8903 lines
346 KiB
Plaintext
8903 lines
346 KiB
Plaintext
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_ACL ==
|
||
Sets permissions on an object.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_ACL ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^acl (--^user=<usr_name> | --^group=<group_name>)
|
||
(-^allowed|-^denied|-^overrideallowed|-^overridedenied=+|-<permission>[,...])[,...]
|
||
<objectspec>
|
||
|
||
--^user User name.
|
||
--^group Group name.
|
||
-^allowed Enables the specified permission or permissions. Use a
|
||
comma to separate permissions. (Use 'cm ^showpermissions'
|
||
to display all the available permissions.)
|
||
-^denied Denies the specified permission or permission. Use a
|
||
comma to separate permissions. (Use 'cm ^showpermissions'
|
||
to display all the available permissions.)
|
||
-^overrideallowed Overrides the allowed permission or permissions. Use a
|
||
comma to separate permissions. (Use 'cm ^showpermissions'
|
||
to display all the available permissions.)
|
||
-^overridedenied Overrides the denied permission or permissions. Use a
|
||
comma to separate permissions. (Use 'cm ^showpermissions'
|
||
to display all the available permissions.)
|
||
objectspec The object whose permissions will be set.
|
||
The valid objects for this command are:
|
||
repserver, repository, branch, label, and attribute.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
|
||
|
||
Special usage for secured paths:
|
||
cm ^acl [(--^user=<usr_name> | --^group=<group_name>)
|
||
(-^allowed|-^denied|-^overrideallowed|-^overridedenied=+|-<permission>[,...])[,...]]
|
||
[--^delete] [--^branches=[+ | -]<branch>[,...]]
|
||
<spec>
|
||
|
||
--^delete Removes a secured path.
|
||
See Remarks for more info.
|
||
--^branches Sets the secured path permissions to a group of branches.
|
||
Use a comma to separate branches.
|
||
Optionally, each branch can be preceded by the + or -
|
||
sign to specify whether a branch must be added or deleted
|
||
to the list when editing.
|
||
See Remarks for more info.
|
||
spec The secured path where to set the permissions.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_ACL ==
|
||
Configuring permissions requires understanding how Unity VCS security works.
|
||
Check the Security Guide to learn how permissions work:
|
||
https://www.plasticscm.com/download/help/securityguide
|
||
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
This command sets permissions for a user or group on the specified objects,
|
||
repositories, branches, labels and/or server paths.
|
||
|
||
Object specs:
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to specify objects.)
|
||
The '^acl' command uses a special type of spec: secured paths.
|
||
|
||
- Secured paths specs:
|
||
^path:server_path[#tag]
|
||
Examples: ^path:/src/foo.c
|
||
^path:/doc/pdf
|
||
^path:/doc/pdf#documents
|
||
|
||
Permission action:
|
||
Use -^allowed and -^denied to specify what permissions to set.
|
||
Use -^overrideallowed and -^overridedenied arguments to specify what
|
||
permissions to override.
|
||
|
||
Each action requires a permission list separated by commas.
|
||
|
||
Permission names:
|
||
Each permission name is preceded by + or - symbol.
|
||
The + symbol sets the permission and the - symbol clears it.
|
||
To see the permissions of an object, use the 'cm ^showacl' command.
|
||
|
||
Overridden permissions:
|
||
Overriding a permission using -^overrideallowed and -^overridedenied
|
||
allows you to bypass inheritance.
|
||
It is helpful to bypass permissions set at the repository or server
|
||
level.
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^acl --^user=vio -^allowed=+^ci -^overrideallowed=+^ci ^br:qa@test
|
||
(Allows user 'vio' to checkin on the branch 'qa' on repo 'test'
|
||
even if she has the permission denied at the repo level.)
|
||
|
||
Server path permissions (a.k.a. secured paths):
|
||
- It is possible to specify permissions for a given server path.
|
||
- These permissions are checked during the checkin operation.
|
||
- These permissions can also be checked during the update operation,
|
||
and can be used as a way to prevent certain directories and files to
|
||
be downloaded to the workspace.
|
||
- For every item to checkin, the server tries to match the item path
|
||
with a secured path. If it matches, the checkin operation checks
|
||
whether the item has permissions to be checked in.
|
||
|
||
The permissions that can be defined for a secured path are the
|
||
following:
|
||
'^ci', '^change', '^add', '^move', '^rm', '^read'
|
||
|
||
If the permissions check is not successful for any of the involved
|
||
items, the checkin operation will be rolled back.
|
||
|
||
To set secured path permissions to a group of branches, use the
|
||
--^branches option.
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^acl --^user=jo -^denied=+^ci ^path:/src#rule0 --^branches=main,main/rel0
|
||
|
||
To edit the ACL associated to the secured path, the tag is useful.
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^acl --^user=jo -^denied=+^rm ^path:/src#rule0
|
||
(Without the tag, the list of branches would need to be specified
|
||
again.)
|
||
|
||
The list of branches of the secured path can be edited.
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^acl ^path:/src#rule0 --^branches=-main,+main/rel1
|
||
(Removes 'main' from the list and adds 'main/rel1'.)
|
||
|
||
To remove a secured path, use the --^delete argument.
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^acl --^user=jo --^delete ^path:/src#rule0
|
||
|
||
Inheritance:
|
||
Inheritance is an option that comes from the days of Plastic SCM 3.0.
|
||
It is advanced, but almost deprecated.
|
||
It lets an object inherit its permissions from any other object,
|
||
overriding the default inheritance relationships.
|
||
|
||
Use the option -^cut to cut the inheritance chain.
|
||
Use the option -^cutncpy to cut and copy the current inherited
|
||
permissions. (This is inspired on the Windows filesystem permissions
|
||
where you can cut inheritance but retain the actual permissions.)
|
||
|
||
The -^inherit option allows the user to inherit from an object spec.
|
||
Example: '-^inherit=object_spec'
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^acl --^user=danipen -^denied=+^ci ^rep:core
|
||
(Denies checkin for user 'danipen' on repo 'core'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^acl --^group=developers -^allowed=+^view,-^read -^denied=+^chgperm ^br:main
|
||
(The command grants view permission, clears read permission,
|
||
and denies chgperm permission to 'developers' group in 'main' branch.)
|
||
|
||
Secured path examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^acl --^group=devs -^denied=+^ci ^path:/server#rel --^branches=main,main/2.0
|
||
(The command denies the checkin permission to 'devs' group for any path
|
||
that matches '/server' in the branches 'main' and 'main/2.0'. The tag '#rel'
|
||
is created to be able to refer to it later.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^acl ^path:/server#rel --^branches=-/main,+/main/Rel2.1
|
||
(Updates the secured path '/server' whose tag is 'rel', removing the
|
||
'main' branch and adding the branch 'main/Rel2.1' to the branch
|
||
group the secured path applies to. Considering the previous example,
|
||
now the branches list will contain 'main/Rel2.1' and 'main/2.0'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^acl --^user=vsanchezm -^allowed=-^read -^overrideallowed=+^read ^path:/doc
|
||
(Removes '^read' permission to 'vsanchezm' overriding it in '/doc' path.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_ACTIVATEUSER ==
|
||
Activates a licensed user.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_ACTIVATEUSER ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^activateuser | ^au <user-name>[ ...] [--^server=<rep-server-spec>]
|
||
|
||
user-name The user name or user names to activate. Use double quotes (" ")
|
||
to specify user names containing spaces. Use a whitespace to
|
||
separate user names.
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
--^server=<rep-server-spec> Activates the user in the specified server.
|
||
If no server is specified, executes the command
|
||
in the default server in the client.conf file.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about
|
||
repserver specs.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_ACTIVATEUSER ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
To activate a user, it must have been previously deactivated.
|
||
By default, a user is activated the first time they perform a write
|
||
operation in Unity VCS. The user is automatically activated only if
|
||
the maximum number of users has not been exceeded.
|
||
|
||
(See the 'cm ^help ^deactivateuser' command for more information about
|
||
deactivating Unity VCS users.)
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^activateuser john
|
||
cm ^activateuser david "mary collins"
|
||
cm ^au peter --^server=localhost:8087
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_ADD ==
|
||
Adds an item to version control.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_ADD ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^add [-^R | -^r | --^recursive] [--^silent] [--^ignorefailed]
|
||
[--^skipcontentcheck] [--^coparent] [--^filetypes=<file>] [--^noinfo]
|
||
[--^format=<str-format>] [--^errorformat=<str-format>]
|
||
<item-path>[ ...]
|
||
|
||
item-path The item or items to add. Use double quotes (" ") to specify
|
||
paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to separate items.
|
||
Use * to add all the contents of the current directory.
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
-^R -^r --^recursive Adds items recursively.
|
||
--^silent Does not show any output.
|
||
--^ignorefailed If an item cannot be added, the add operation will
|
||
continue without it. Note: If a directory cannot be
|
||
added, its content is not added.
|
||
--^skipcontentcheck When the extension is not enough to set the file as
|
||
text or binary, it will be set as binary instead of
|
||
checking the content to detect the type. This is done
|
||
to increase performance on huge checkins.
|
||
--^coparent Runs a checkout of the parent of the item being added.
|
||
--^filetypes The filetypes file to use. Check the following link for
|
||
more information:
|
||
http://blog.plasticscm.com/2008/03/custom-file-types.html
|
||
--^noinfo Doesn't print progress information.
|
||
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. Check
|
||
the examples for more information.
|
||
--^errorformat Retrieves the error message (if any) in a specific
|
||
format. Check the examples for more information.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_ADD ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
Requirements to add items:
|
||
- The parent directory of the item to add must have been previously added.
|
||
|
||
Reading input from stdin:
|
||
|
||
The '^add' command can read paths from stdin. To do this, pass a single dash
|
||
"-".
|
||
Example: cm ^add -
|
||
|
||
Paths will be read until an empty line is entered.
|
||
This allows you to use pipe to specify which files to add.
|
||
Example:
|
||
dir /S /B *.c | cm ^add -
|
||
(In Windows, adds all .c files in the workspace.)
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^add file1.txt file2.txt
|
||
(Adds 'file1.txt' and 'file2.txt' items.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^add c:\workspace\file.txt
|
||
(Adds 'file.txt' item in path 'c:\workspace'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^add -^R c:\workspace\src
|
||
(Recursively adds 'src'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^add -^R *
|
||
(Recursively adds all the contents of the current directory.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^add -^R * --^filetypes=filetypes.conf
|
||
(Recursively adds all the contents of the current directory, using
|
||
'filetypes.conf' to assign a type to each file based on its extension,
|
||
instead of checking its content.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^add --^coparent c:\workspace\dir\file.txt
|
||
(Adds 'file.txt' to source control, and performs a checkout of 'dir'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^add -^R * --^format="ADD {0}" --^errorformat="ERR {0}"
|
||
(Recursively adds all the contents of the current directory, printing
|
||
'^ADD <item>' for successfully added files, and '^ERR <item>' for items that
|
||
could not be added.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_ADMIN ==
|
||
Executes administrative commands on the server.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_ADMIN ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^admin <command> [options]
|
||
|
||
Available commands:
|
||
|
||
^readonly
|
||
|
||
To get more information about each command run:
|
||
cm ^admin <command> --^usage
|
||
cm ^admin <command> --^help
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_ADMIN ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
Only the server administrator can execute administrative commands.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^admin ^readonly ^enter
|
||
cm ^admin ^readonly ^status
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_ADMIN_READONLY ==
|
||
Enables/disables the server readonly mode.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_ADMIN_READONLY ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^admin ^readonly (^enter | ^leave | ^status) [<server>]
|
||
|
||
Actions:
|
||
|
||
^enter The server enters read-only mode. Write operations will be rejected.
|
||
^leave The server leaves read-only mode.
|
||
^status Shows the server read-only mode status.
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
server Executes the command in the specified server (server:port). (Use
|
||
'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about server specs.)
|
||
If no server is specified, the command works with the server of the
|
||
current workspace.
|
||
If the current path is not in a workspace, the command works with
|
||
the default server defined in the client.conf config file.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_ADMIN_READONLY ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
Only the server administrator can enter the server readonly mode.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^admin ^readonly ^enter diana:8086
|
||
cm ^admin ^readonly ^leave
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_ANNOTATE ==
|
||
Shows the changeset where each line of a file was last modified and its author.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_ANNOTATE ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^annotate | ^blame <spec>[ ...]
|
||
[--^format=<str_format>]
|
||
[--^comparisonmethod=(^ignoreeol | ^ignorewhitespaces
|
||
| ^ignoreeolandwhitespaces | ^recognizeall)]
|
||
[--^dateformat=<str_date_format>]
|
||
[--^encoding=<name>]
|
||
[--^stats]
|
||
[--^repository=<repspec>]
|
||
|
||
spec The spec of the file to annotate.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
|
||
Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths containing spaces.
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
|
||
Remarks for more info.
|
||
--^comparisonmethod Sets the specified comparison method. See Remarks for more info.
|
||
--^dateformat Sets the output format to print dates.
|
||
--^encoding Specifies the output encoding, i.e.: utf-8.
|
||
See the MSDN documentation at
|
||
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
|
||
to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
|
||
(at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
|
||
--^stats Shows statistics information.
|
||
--^repository Specifies a repository spec used to calculate
|
||
the annotations. By default, this command uses the
|
||
repository where the loaded revision repository in the
|
||
workspace is stored. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn
|
||
more about repspecs.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_ANNOTATE ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
Binary files can't be annotated.
|
||
|
||
Comparison methods (--^comparisonmethod option):
|
||
^ignoreeol Ignores the end of line differences.
|
||
^ignorewhitespaces Ignores the whitespace differences.
|
||
^ignoreeolandwhitespaces Ignores the end of line and whitespace differences.
|
||
^recognizeall Detects the end of line and whitespace differences.
|
||
|
||
Output format parameters (--^format option):
|
||
This command accepts a format string to show the output.
|
||
The output parameters of this command are the following:
|
||
{^owner} User who changed the line the last time.
|
||
{^rev} Source revision specification of the line.
|
||
{^content} Line content.
|
||
{^date} Date when the line was checked in.
|
||
{^comment} Comment of the source revision of the line.
|
||
{^changeset} Changeset of the source revision of the line.
|
||
{^line} Line number of the file.
|
||
{^id} Item id.
|
||
{^parentid} Parent id of the item.
|
||
{^rep} Repository of the item.
|
||
{^branch} Branch of the source revision of the line.
|
||
{^ismergerev} Whether the revision of the line was created in a merge.
|
||
|
||
--^dateformat:
|
||
To specify the output format in which dates will be printed.
|
||
See the supported formats specified at:
|
||
https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dotnet/standard/base-types/custom-date-and-time-format-strings
|
||
|
||
--^repository:
|
||
To retrieve data from a remote repository. Useful for distributed
|
||
scenarios.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^blame c:\workspace\src --^comparisonmethod=^ignoreeolandwhitespaces --^encoding=utf-8
|
||
cm ^annotate c:\workspace\file.txt --^comparisonmethod=^ignoreeol
|
||
|
||
cm ^annotate c:\workspace\file.txt --^format="{^owner} {^date, 10} {^content}"
|
||
(Writes the owner field, then a blank, then the date field (aligned to
|
||
right), then a blank, and the content.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^blame c:\workspace\file.txt --^format="{^owner, -7} {^comment} {^date}" \
|
||
--^dateformat=yyyyMMdd
|
||
(Writes the owner field in 7 spaces (aligned to the left) followed by
|
||
a blank, then the comment, followed by another blank, and ending with the
|
||
formatted date (for example, 20170329).)
|
||
|
||
cm ^annotate c:\workspace\file.txt --^repository=centralRep@myserver:8084
|
||
|
||
cm ^blame ^serverpath:/src/client/checkin/Checkin.cs#^cs:73666
|
||
(Annotates the file starting in changeset 73666 using a server path.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_APPLY_LOCAL ==
|
||
Checks for local changes (locally moved, locally deleted, and locally changed)
|
||
and applies them, so that Unity VCS starts tracking those changes.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_APPLY_LOCAL ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^applylocal | ^al [--^dependencies] [<item_path>[ ...]]
|
||
[--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
|
||
[--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^dependencies Adds local change dependencies into the items to
|
||
apply.
|
||
item_path Items to be applied. Use a whitespace to separate
|
||
paths. Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths
|
||
containing spaces.
|
||
--^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
|
||
--^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
|
||
the lines should start.
|
||
--^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
|
||
the lines should end.
|
||
--^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
|
||
the fields should be separated.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_APPLY_LOCAL ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
- If --^dependencies and <item_path> are not specified, the operation involves
|
||
all the local changes in the workspace.
|
||
|
||
- It is always applied recursively from the given path.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^applylocal foo.c bar.c
|
||
|
||
cm ^applylocal .
|
||
(Applies all local changes in the current directory.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^applylocal
|
||
(Applies all local changes in the workspace.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^applylocal --^machinereadable
|
||
(Applies all local changes in the workspace, and prints the result in a
|
||
simplified, easier-to-parse format.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^applylocal --^machinereadable --^startlineseparator=">" \
|
||
--^endlineseparator="<" --^fieldseparator=","
|
||
(Applies all local changes in the workspace, and prints the result in a
|
||
simplified, easier-to-parse format, starting and ending the lines and
|
||
separating the fields with the specified strings.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_ARCHIVE ==
|
||
Archives data in external storage.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_ARCHIVE ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^archive | ^arch <revspec>[ ...] [-^c=<str_comment>]
|
||
[--^file=<base_file>]
|
||
(Extracts data from the repository and stores it on external storage.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^archive | ^arch <revspec>[ ...] --^restore
|
||
(Restores previously archived revisions back into the repository.)
|
||
|
||
revspec One or more revision specs. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec'
|
||
to learn more about revspecs.)
|
||
--^restore Restores previously archived data from generated archive
|
||
files. The external storage location and the
|
||
externaldata.conf file must be available at the moment
|
||
of the revision restoration. See Remarks for more
|
||
information.
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
-^c Sets a comment in the archive storage files to create.
|
||
--^file Name prefix and (optional) path for the new archive
|
||
data files.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_ARCHIVE ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
This command extracts data from the repository database and store it on
|
||
external storage, saving database space.
|
||
The command can also restore (--^restore) previously archived revisions back
|
||
into the repository database.
|
||
|
||
Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to specify a revspec.
|
||
|
||
The user running this command must be the Unity VCS server administrator
|
||
(repository server owner) to be allowed to complete the operation.
|
||
|
||
Every data segment from the specified revisions will be stored in a
|
||
different file, with a name starting with the value defined by the --^file
|
||
argument. This argument can contain either a full path value including a
|
||
prefix for future archive files or just this prefix value.
|
||
|
||
Once archived, the data from the specified revisions will be accessible in
|
||
two ways:
|
||
|
||
1. From the client: The client will detect if the data was archived and it
|
||
will prompt the user to enter the location of the files.
|
||
Users can configure the external data location by creating a file named
|
||
externaldata.conf (at the standard configuration files locations, using
|
||
the same rules that apply for the client.conf file) containing the paths
|
||
where archived data have been located.
|
||
|
||
2. From the server: This way users won't have to know whether the data was
|
||
archived or not, since requests will be transparently resolved by the
|
||
server. To do so, the administrator will create a file called
|
||
externaldata.conf in the server directory and will fill it with the
|
||
paths where the archived volumes are.
|
||
|
||
To unarchive (restore) a revision (or set of revisions), the archived
|
||
files must be accessible from the client. Hence, it is not possible to
|
||
unarchive data being resolved by the server (method 2) because the client
|
||
will not be able to identify it as archived.
|
||
If method 2 is used, to unarchive successfully, the administrator will have
|
||
to edit the externaldata.conf server file first to remove access to the
|
||
archived files which have to be unarchived.
|
||
|
||
Archive example:
|
||
1) Archive one revision:
|
||
cm ^archive Assets/RoofTextures/Textures/Wooden_Roof_05.png --^file=/Users/ruben/archive/battle
|
||
2) See the archived revision in the specified output path:
|
||
^ls -^al /Users/ruben/archive/battle*
|
||
-rw-r--r-- 1 ruben staff 2220039 Nov 9 10:52 /Users/ruben/archive/battle-100280-167
|
||
|
||
Unarchive (restore) example:
|
||
1) Add the output archive folder to the externaldata.conf file:
|
||
^vi /Users/ruben/.plastic4/externaldata.conf
|
||
/Users/ruben/archive
|
||
2) Unarchive the revision:
|
||
cm ^archive Assets/RoofTextures/Textures/Wooden_Roof_05.png --^restore
|
||
|
||
Set the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable to specify an editor for
|
||
entering comments. If the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable is set, and
|
||
the comment is empty, the editor will be automatically launched to allow
|
||
you to specify the comment.
|
||
|
||
Reading input from stdin:
|
||
|
||
The '^archive' command can read paths from stdin. To do this, pass a single
|
||
dash "-".
|
||
Example: cm ^archive -
|
||
|
||
Paths will be read until an empty line is entered.
|
||
This allows you to use pipe to specify which files to archive.
|
||
Example:
|
||
dir /S /B *.c | cm ^archive -
|
||
(In Windows, archives all .c files in the workspace.)
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^archive bigfile.zip#^br:/^main
|
||
(Archives the last revision of 'bigfile.zip' in branch 'main'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^archive bigfile.zip#^br:/^main --^restore
|
||
(Restores the archived revision.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^archive ^rev:myfile.pdf#^cs:2 -^c="big pdf file" --^file=c:\arch_files\arch
|
||
(Archives the revision with changeset 2 of myfile.pdf in 'c:\archived_files'
|
||
folder. The archived file name will start with 'arch' (for example, arch_11_56).)
|
||
|
||
cm ^find "^revs ^where ^size > 26214400" --^format="{^item}#{^branch}" \
|
||
--^nototal | cm ^archive -^c="volume00" --^file="volume00" -
|
||
(Archives all the files bigger than 25Mb on files starting with name
|
||
'volume00'.)
|
||
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_ATTRIBUTE ==
|
||
Allows the user to manage attributes.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_ATTRIBUTE ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^attribute | ^att <command> [options]
|
||
|
||
Commands:
|
||
|
||
^create | ^mk
|
||
^delete | ^rm
|
||
^set
|
||
^unset
|
||
^rename
|
||
^edit
|
||
|
||
To get more information about each command run:
|
||
cm ^attribute <command> --^usage
|
||
cm ^attribute <command> --^help
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_ATTRIBUTE ==
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^attribute ^create status
|
||
cm ^attribute ^set ^att:status ^br:/main/SCM105 open
|
||
cm ^attribute ^unset ^att:status ^br:/main/SCM105
|
||
cm ^attribute ^delete ^att:status
|
||
cm ^attribute ^rename ^att:status "buildStatus"
|
||
cm ^attribute ^edit ^att:status "Status of the task in the CI pipeline"
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHANGELIST ==
|
||
Groups pending changes in changelists.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_CHANGELIST ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
a) Management of changelists objects:
|
||
|
||
cm ^changelist | ^clist [--^symlink]
|
||
(Displays all changelists.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^changelist | ^clist ^create <clist_name>
|
||
[<clist_desc>] [--^persistent | --^notpersistent] [--^symlink]
|
||
(Creates a changelist.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^changelist | ^clist ^delete <clist_name> [--^symlink]
|
||
(Deletes the selected changelist. If this changelist contains pending
|
||
changes, then these will be moved to the ^default changelist.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^changelist | ^clist ^edit <clist_name> [<action_name> <action_value>]
|
||
[--^persistent | --^notpersistent] [--^symlink]
|
||
(Edits the selected changelist.)
|
||
|
||
b) Management of contents of a given changelist:
|
||
|
||
cm ^changelist | ^clist <clist_name> (^add | ^rm) <path_name>[ ...]
|
||
[--^symlink]
|
||
(Edits the selected changelist by adding ('^add') or removing ('^rm') the
|
||
change(s) that match with the given path_name(s). Use a whitespace to
|
||
separate path_names. Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths containing
|
||
spaces. The status of the paths must be '^Added' or '^Checked-out'.)
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
clist_name The name of the changelist. A path to a file containing
|
||
the name can be used instead. More info at --^namefile.
|
||
clist_desc The description of the changelist. A path to a file
|
||
containing the description can be used instead. More
|
||
info at --^descriptionfile.
|
||
action_name Choose between '^rename' or '^description' to edit the
|
||
changelist.
|
||
action_value Applies the new name or new description when editing
|
||
the changelist.
|
||
--^persistent The changelist will remain in the workspace even if its
|
||
contents are checked-in or reverted.
|
||
--^notpersistent (Default) The changelist will not remain in the
|
||
workspace even if its contents are checked-in or
|
||
reverted.
|
||
--^symlink Applies the operation to the symlink and not to the
|
||
target.
|
||
--^namefile A valid path to a file containing the name of the
|
||
changelist. Bear in mind the file must exist and its
|
||
content cannot be neither empty nor multiline.
|
||
--^newnamefile A valid path to a file containing the new name of the
|
||
changelist when renaming. Bear in mind the file must exist
|
||
and its content cannot be neither empty nor multiline.
|
||
--^descriptionfile A valid path to a file containing the description for the
|
||
changelist. Bear in mind the file must exist.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_CHANGELIST ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
The '^changelist' command handles both the workspace pending changelists and
|
||
the changes contained in a changelist.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^changelist
|
||
(Shows the current workspace changelists.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^changelist ^create config_changes "dotConf files" --^persistent
|
||
(Creates a new changelist named 'config_changes' and description 'dotConf
|
||
files' which will remain persistent in the current workspace once the
|
||
pending changelist is either checked-in or reverted.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^changelist ^create --^namefile="name.txt" --^descriptionfile="desc.txt"
|
||
(Creates a new changelist which name and description are both taken from files.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^changelist ^edit config_changes ^rename config_files --^notpersistent
|
||
(Edits the changelist named 'config_changes' and renames it to
|
||
'config_files'. Also, it turns the changelist into "not persistent".)
|
||
|
||
cm ^changelist ^edit config_changes --^notpersistent
|
||
(Edits the changelist named 'config_changes' by turning it into "not persistent".)
|
||
|
||
cm ^changelist ^delete config_files
|
||
(Removes the pending changelist 'config_files' from the current workspace.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^changelist ^delete --namefile="name.txt"
|
||
(Removes the changelist identified by the content of 'name.txt' file from the current
|
||
workspace.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^changelist config_files ^add foo.conf
|
||
(Adds the file 'foo.conf' to the 'config_files' changelist.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^changelist config_files ^rm foo.conf readme.txt
|
||
(Removes the files 'foo.conf' and 'readme.txt' from the 'config_files'
|
||
changelist and moves the files to the system default changelist.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^changelist ^edit --^namefile="name.txt" ^description --^descriptionfile="desc.txt"
|
||
(Edits the changelist identified by the content of 'name.txt' file, changing its
|
||
description to the text content of the 'desc.txt' file.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^changelist ^edit --^namefile="name.txt" ^rename --^newnamefile="newname.txt"
|
||
(Edits the changelist identified by the content of 'name.txt' file, renaming it to
|
||
the text content of the 'newname.txt' file.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHANGESET ==
|
||
Executes advanced operations on changesets.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_CHANGESET ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^changeset <command> [options]
|
||
|
||
Commands:
|
||
|
||
^move | ^mv
|
||
^delete | ^rm
|
||
^editcomment | ^edit
|
||
|
||
To get more information about each command run:
|
||
cm ^changeset <command> --^usage
|
||
cm ^changeset <command> --^help
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_CHANGESET ==
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^changeset ^move ^cs:15@myrepo ^br:/main/scm005@myrepo
|
||
cm ^changeset ^delete ^cs:2b55f8aa-0b29-410f-b99c-60e573a309ca@devData
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHANGESET_EDIT_COMMENT ==
|
||
Modifies the comment of a changeset.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_CHANGESET_EDIT_COMMENT ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^changeset ^editcomment | ^edit <csetspec> <new_comment>
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
csetspec The target changeset whose comment will be edited.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about changeset
|
||
specs.)
|
||
new_comment The new comment that will be added to the targeted
|
||
changeset.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_CHANGESET_EDIT_COMMENT ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
- The targeted changeset spec must be valid.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^changeset ^editcomment ^cs:15@myrepo "I forgot to add the checkin details"
|
||
cm ^changeset ^edit ^cs:cb11ecdb-1aa9-4f11-8698-dcab14e5885a \
|
||
"This comment text will replace the previous one."
|
||
cm ^changeset ^edit "89095131-895d-4173-9440-ff9ef9b2538d@project@cloud" \
|
||
"Changing my comment"
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHANGESET_MOVE ==
|
||
Moves a changeset and all its descendants to a different branch.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_CHANGESET_MOVE ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^changeset ^move | ^mv <csetspec> <branchspec>
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
csetspec First changeset to be moved to a different branch. All
|
||
descendant changesets in the same branch will be
|
||
targeted by the command as well.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about changeset
|
||
specs.)
|
||
branchspec The target branch where the targeted changesets are
|
||
stored. It needs to be empty or non-existing; if the
|
||
destination branch doesn't exist, it will be created by
|
||
the command.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about branch
|
||
specs.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_CHANGESET_MOVE ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
- The targeted changeset spec must be valid.
|
||
- The destination branch must be either empty or non-existing.
|
||
- If the destination branch doesn't exist, it will created.
|
||
- Merge links will be kept unchanged since branches don't affect them.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^changeset ^move ^cs:15@myrepo ^br:/main/scm005@myrepo
|
||
cm ^changeset ^move ^cs:cb11ecdb-1aa9-4f11-8698-dcab14e5885a ^br:/hotfix/TL-352
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHANGESET_DELETE ==
|
||
Deletes a changeset from the repository.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_CHANGESET_DELETE ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^changeset ^delete | ^rm <csetspec>
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
csetspec The target changeset to be removed. It must fulfill
|
||
some specific conditions. See Remarks for more info.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about changeset
|
||
specs.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_CHANGESET_DELETE ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
- The target changeset must be the last in its branch.
|
||
- The target changeset cannot be the parent of any other changeset.
|
||
- The target changeset cannot be neither the source of a merge link nor
|
||
part of an interval merge as source.
|
||
- No label must be applied to the target changeset.
|
||
- The target changeset must not be the root changeset ('^cs:0').
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^changeset ^rm ^cs:4525@myrepo@myserver
|
||
cm ^changeset ^delete ^cs:cb11ecdb-1aa9-4f11-8698-dcab14e5885a
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHANGEUSERPASSWORD ==
|
||
Changes the user's password (UP).
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_CHANGEUSERPASSWORD ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^changepassword | ^passwd
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_CHANGEUSERPASSWORD ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
This command is only available when the security configuration is UP
|
||
(user/password).
|
||
See the Administrator Guide for more information:
|
||
https://www.plasticscm.com/download/help/adminguide
|
||
|
||
The old and new passwords are required.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^passwd
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHECKCONNECTION ==
|
||
Checks the connection to the server.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_CHECKCONNECTION ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^checkconnection | ^cc
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_CHECKCONNECTION ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
- This command returns a message indicating whether there is a valid
|
||
connection to the configured Unity VCS server.
|
||
- The command checks checks the version compatibility with the server.
|
||
- The command also checks whether the configured user is valid or not.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHECKDB ==
|
||
Checks the repositories integrity.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_CHECKDB ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^checkdatabase | ^chkdb [<repserverspec> | <repspec>]
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
repserverspec Repositories server.
|
||
repspec Repository.
|
||
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repserver and rep specs.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_CHECKDB ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
- If neither repserverspec nor repspec are specified, the check will be
|
||
performed in the server specified in the client.conf file.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^checkdatabase ^repserver:localhost:8084
|
||
cm ^chkdb ^rep:default@localhost:8084
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHECKIN ==
|
||
Stores changes in the repository.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_CHECKIN ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^checkin | ^ci [<item_path>[ ...]]
|
||
[-^c=<str_comment> | -^commentsfile=<comments_file>]
|
||
[--^all|-^a] [--^applychanged] [--^private] [--^update] [--^symlink]
|
||
[--^noshowchangeset]
|
||
[--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
|
||
[--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
item_path Items to be checked-in. Use double quotes (" ") to
|
||
specify paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to
|
||
separate item paths.
|
||
Use . to apply checkin to current directory.
|
||
-^c Applies the specified comment to the changeset created
|
||
in the checkin operation.
|
||
-^commentsfile Applies the comment in the specified file to the
|
||
changeset created in the checkin operation.
|
||
--^all | -^a The items changed, moved and deleted locally on the
|
||
given paths are also included.
|
||
--^applychanged Applies the checkin operation to the changed items
|
||
detected in the workspace along with the checked out
|
||
items.
|
||
--^private Private items detected in the workspace are also
|
||
included.
|
||
--^update Processes the update-merge automatically if it
|
||
eventually happens.
|
||
--^symlink Applies the checkin operation to the symlink and not
|
||
to the target.
|
||
--^noshowchangeset Doesn't print the result changeset.
|
||
--^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
|
||
--^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
|
||
the lines should start.
|
||
--^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
|
||
the lines should end.
|
||
--^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
|
||
the fields should be separated.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_CHECKIN ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
- If <item_path> is not specified, the checkin involves all the
|
||
pending changes in the workspace.
|
||
- The checkin operation is always applied recursively from the given path.
|
||
- To checkin an item:
|
||
- The item must be under source code control.
|
||
- If the item is private (not under source code control), the --^private
|
||
flag is necessary in order to checkin it.
|
||
- The item must be checked out.
|
||
- If the item is changed but not checked out, the --^applychanged flag
|
||
is not necessary unless <item_path> is a directory or it contains
|
||
wildcards ('*').
|
||
|
||
Revision content should be different from previous revision in order to be
|
||
checked in.
|
||
|
||
Set the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable to specify an editor for
|
||
entering comments. If the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable is set, and
|
||
the comment is empty, the editor will be automatically launched to allow
|
||
you to specify the comment.
|
||
|
||
Reading input from stdin:
|
||
|
||
The '^checkin' command can read paths from stdin. To do this, pass a single
|
||
dash "-".
|
||
Example: cm ^checkin -
|
||
|
||
Paths will be read until an empty line is entered.
|
||
This allows you to use pipe to specify which files to checkin.
|
||
Example:
|
||
dir /S /B *.c | cm ^checkin --^all -
|
||
(In Windows, checkins all .c files in the workspace.)
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^checkin file1.txt file2.txt
|
||
(Checkins the 'file1.txt' and 'file2.txt' checked-out files.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^checkin . -^commentsfile=mycomment.txt
|
||
(Checkins the current directory and sets the comment in the
|
||
'mycomment.txt' file.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^checkin link --^symlink
|
||
(Checkins the symlink file and not the target.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^ci file1.txt -^c="my comment"
|
||
(Checkins 'file1.txt' and includes a comment.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^status --^short --^compact --^changelist=pending_to_review | cm ^checkin -
|
||
(Lists the paths in the changelist named 'pending_to_review' and redirects
|
||
this list to the input of the checkin command.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^ci . --^machinereadable
|
||
(Checkins the current directory, and prints the result in a simplified,
|
||
easier-to-parse format.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^ci . --^machinereadable --^startlineseparator=">" --^endlineseparator="<" --^fieldseparator=","
|
||
(Checkins the current directory, and prints the result in a simplified,
|
||
easier-to-parse format, starting and ending the lines, and
|
||
separating the fields with the specified strings.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHECKOUT ==
|
||
Marks files as ready to modify.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_CHECKOUT ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^checkout | ^co [<item_path>[ ...]] [-^R | -^r | --^recursive]
|
||
[--^format=<str_format>]
|
||
[--^errorformat=<str_format>] [--^resultformat=<str_format>]
|
||
[--^silent] [--^symlink] [--^ignorefailed]
|
||
[--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
|
||
[--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
item_path Items to be checked-out. Use double quotes (" ") to
|
||
specify paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to
|
||
separate item paths.
|
||
Use . to apply checkout to current directory.
|
||
-^R Checks out files recursively.
|
||
--^format Retrieves the output progress message in a specific
|
||
format. Check the examples for more information.
|
||
--^resultformat Retrieves the output result message in a specific
|
||
format. Check the examples for more information.
|
||
--^silent Does not show any output at all.
|
||
--^symlink Applies the checkout operation to the symlink and not
|
||
to the target.
|
||
--^ignorefailed If an item cannot be locked (the exclusive checkout
|
||
cannot be performed), the checkout operation will
|
||
continue without it.
|
||
--^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
|
||
--^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
|
||
the lines should start.
|
||
--^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
|
||
the lines should end.
|
||
--^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
|
||
the fields should be separated.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_CHECKOUT ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
To checkout an item:
|
||
- The item must be under source code control.
|
||
- The item must be checked-in.
|
||
|
||
If locks are configured on the server (lock.conf exists), then each time
|
||
a checkout on a path happens, Unity VCS checks if it meets any of the rules
|
||
and if so, the path will be in exclusive checkout (locked) so that none can
|
||
simultaneously checkout.
|
||
You can get all the locks in the server by using 'cm ^lock ^list'.
|
||
See the Administrator Guide for more information:
|
||
https://www.plasticscm.com/download/help/adminguide
|
||
|
||
The format string replaces the placeholder '{0}' with the path of the item
|
||
being checked out. Check the examples to see how to use it.
|
||
|
||
Reading input from stdin:
|
||
|
||
The '^checkout' command can read paths from stdin. To do this, pass a single
|
||
dash "-".
|
||
Example: cm ^checkout -
|
||
|
||
Paths will be read until an empty line is entered.
|
||
This allows you to use pipe to specify which files to checkout.
|
||
Example:
|
||
dir /S /B *.c | cm ^checkout -
|
||
(In Windows, checkouts all .c files in the workspace.)
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^checkout file1.txt file2.txt
|
||
(Checkouts 'file1.txt' and 'file2.txt' files.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^co *.txt
|
||
(Checkouts all txt files.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^checkout .
|
||
(Checkouts current directory.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^checkout -^R c:\workspace\src
|
||
(Recursively checkouts 'src' folder.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^co file.txt --^format="Checking out item {0}"
|
||
--^resultformat="Item {0} checked out"
|
||
(Checkouts 'file.txt' using the specified formatting strings
|
||
to show the progress and the result of the operation.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^checkout link --^symlink
|
||
(Checkouts the symlink file and not the target.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^checkout . -^R --^ignorefailed
|
||
(Recursively checkouts the current folder, ignoring those files that can
|
||
not be checked out.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^co . --^machinereadable --^startlineseparator=">"
|
||
(Checkouts the current directory, and prints the result in a simplified,
|
||
easier-to-parse format, starting the lines with the specified strings.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHECKSELECTORSYNTAX ==
|
||
Checks the syntax of a selector.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_CHECKSELECTORSYNTAX ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^checkselectorsyntax | ^css --^file=<selector_file>
|
||
(Checks the selector file syntax.)
|
||
|
||
^cat <selector_file> | cm ^checkselectorsyntax | ^css -
|
||
(Unix. Checks selector file from standard input.)
|
||
|
||
^type <selector_file> | cm ^checkselectorsyntax | ^css -
|
||
(Windows. Checks selector file from standard input.)
|
||
|
||
|
||
--^file The file to read a selector from.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_CHECKSELECTORSYNTAX ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
This command reads a selector on either a file or standard input, and
|
||
checks it for valid syntax. If the syntax check fails, the reason is
|
||
printed on standard output.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^checkselectorsyntax --^file=myselector.txt
|
||
(Checks the syntax of 'myselector.txt' file.)
|
||
|
||
^cat myselector.txt | cm ^checkselectorsyntax
|
||
(Checks the syntax of 'myselector.txt' from standard input.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHGREVTYPE ==
|
||
Changes an item revision type (binary or text).
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_CHGREVTYPE ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^changerevisiontype | ^chgrevtype | ^crt <item_path>[ ...] --^type=(^bin | ^txt)
|
||
|
||
item_path Items to change revision type. Use double quotes (" ")
|
||
to specify paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to
|
||
separate item paths.
|
||
--^type Target revisions type. Choose '^bin' or '^txt'.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_CHGREVTYPE ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
This command can only be applied to files, not directories.
|
||
The specified type must be a system supported one: '^bin' or '^txt' (binary
|
||
or text).
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^changerevisiontype c:\workspace\file.txt --^type=^txt
|
||
(Changes 'file.txt' revision type to text.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^chgrevtype comp.zip "image file.jpg" --^type=^bin
|
||
(Changes 'comp.zip' and "image file.jpg" revision type to binary.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^crt *.* --^type=^txt
|
||
(Changes revision type of all files to text.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_TRIGGER_EDIT ==
|
||
Edits a trigger.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_TRIGGER_EDIT ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^trigger | ^tr ^edit <subtype_type> <position_number>
|
||
[--^position=<new_position>]
|
||
[--^name=<new_name>] [--^script=<script_path>]
|
||
[--^filter=<str_filter>] [--^server=<repserverspec>]
|
||
|
||
subtype_type Trigger execution and trigger operation.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^showtriggertypes' to see a list of trigger
|
||
types.)
|
||
position_number Position occupied by the trigger to be modified.
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^position New position of the specified trigger.
|
||
This position must not be in use by another
|
||
trigger of the same type.
|
||
--^name New name of the specified trigger.
|
||
--^script New execution path of the specified trigger script.
|
||
If the script starts with "^webtrigger ", it will be
|
||
considered as a web trigger. See Remarks for more
|
||
further details.
|
||
--^filter Checks only items that match the specified filter.
|
||
--^server Modifies the trigger on the specified server.
|
||
If no server is specified, executes the command on the
|
||
one configured on the client.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about server
|
||
specs.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_TRIGGER_EDIT ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
Web triggers: A web trigger is created by typing "^webtrigger <target-uri>"
|
||
as the trigger command. In this case, the trigger will execute a POST query
|
||
against the specified URI, where the request body contains a JSON
|
||
dictionary with the trigger environment variables, and a fixed INPUT key
|
||
pointing to an array of strings.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^trigger ^edit ^after-setselector 6 --^name="Backup2 manager" --^script="/new/path/al/script"
|
||
cm ^tr ^edit ^before-mklabel 7 --^position=4 --^server=myserver:8084
|
||
cm ^trigger ^edit ^after-add 2 --^script="^webtrigger http://myserver.org/api"
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_CODEREVIEW ==
|
||
Creates, edits, or deletes code reviews.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_CODEREVIEW ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^codereview <spec> <title> [--^status=<status_name>]
|
||
[--^assignee=<user_name>] [--^format=<str_format>]
|
||
[--^repository=<rep_spec>]
|
||
(Creates a code review.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^codereview -^e <id> [--^status=<status_name>] [--^assignee=<user_name>]
|
||
[--^repository=<rep_spec>]
|
||
(Edits a code review.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^codereview -^d <id> [ ...] [--^repository=<rep_spec>]
|
||
(Deletes one or more code reviews.)
|
||
|
||
|
||
spec It can be either a changeset spec, a shelve spec or a branch spec.
|
||
It will be the target of the new code review. (Use 'cm ^help
|
||
^objectspec' to learn more about changeset or branch specs.)
|
||
title A text string to be used as title of the new code review.
|
||
id The code review identification number. A GUID can be used as
|
||
well.
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
-^e Edits the parameters of an existing code review.
|
||
-^d Deletes one or more existing code reviews. Use a
|
||
whitespace to separate the code reviews IDs.
|
||
--^status Sets the new status of a code review. See Remarks for
|
||
additional information.
|
||
--^assignee Sets the new assignee of a code review.
|
||
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
|
||
Remarks for additional information.
|
||
--^repository Sets the repository to be used as default. (Use
|
||
'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repository specs.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_CODEREVIEW ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
This command allows users to manage code reviews: create, edit, and delete
|
||
code reviews for changesets or branches.
|
||
|
||
To create a new code review, a changeset/branch spec and a title are
|
||
required. The initial status and assignee can be set, too. An ID (or GUID
|
||
if requested) will be returned as a result.
|
||
|
||
To edit or delete an existing code review, the target code review ID
|
||
(or GUID) is required. No messages are displayed if there are no errors.
|
||
|
||
The 'status parameter' must only be one of the following: ^"Under review"
|
||
(default), ^"Reviewed", or ^"Rework required".
|
||
|
||
The 'repository' parameter is available to set the default working
|
||
repository. This is useful when the user wants to manage reviews on
|
||
a server different than the one associated to the current workspace, or
|
||
when there is no current workspace at all.
|
||
|
||
Output format parameters (--^format option):
|
||
This command accepts a format string to show the output.
|
||
The output parameters of this command are the following:
|
||
{0} id
|
||
{1} guid
|
||
|
||
Please note that the '--^format' parameter only takes effect when creating
|
||
a new code review.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^codereview ^cs:1856@myrepo@myserver:8084 "My code review" --^assignee=dummy
|
||
cm ^codereview ^br:/main/task001@myrepo@myserver:8084 "My code review" \
|
||
--^status=^"Rework required" --^assignee=newbie --^format="{^id} -> {^guid}"
|
||
|
||
cm ^codereview 1367 -^e --^assignee=new_assignee
|
||
cm ^codereview -^e 27658884-5dcc-49b7-b0ef-a5760ae740a3 --^status=Reviewed
|
||
|
||
cm ^codereview -^d 1367 --^repository=myremoterepo@myremoteserver:18084
|
||
cm ^codereview 27658884-5dcc-49b7-b0ef-a5760ae740a3 -^d
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_CRYPT ==
|
||
Encrypts a password.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_CRYPT ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^crypt <mypassword>
|
||
|
||
mypassword Password to be encrypted.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_CRYPT ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
This command encrypts a given password passed as argument.
|
||
It is designed to encrypt passwords in configuration files and increase
|
||
safety.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^crypt dbconfpassword -> ENCRYPTED: encrypteddbconfpassword
|
||
(Encrypts the password in the database configuration file: 'db.conf'.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_DEACTIVATEUSER ==
|
||
Deactivates a licensed user.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_DEACTIVATEUSER ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^deactivateuser | ^du <usr_name>[ ...] [--^server=<name:port>]
|
||
[--^nosolveuser]
|
||
|
||
usr_name The user name(s) to deactivate. Use a whitespace to
|
||
separate user names.
|
||
If SID, then '--^nosolveuser' is required.
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^server Deactivates the user on the specified server.
|
||
If no server is specified, executes the command on the
|
||
one configured on the client.
|
||
--^nosolveuser With this option, the command will not check whether
|
||
the user name exists on the authentication system. The
|
||
<usr_name> must be a user SID.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_DEACTIVATEUSER ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
This command sets a user to inactive, disabling the usage of Unity VCS
|
||
for that user.
|
||
|
||
See the 'cm ^activateuser' command for more information about activating
|
||
Unity VCS users.
|
||
|
||
This command checks whether the user exists on the underlying authentication
|
||
system (e.g. ActiveDirectory, LDAP, User/Password...).
|
||
To force the deactivation of a user that no longer exists on the
|
||
authentication system, you can use the '--^nosolveuser' option.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^deactivateuser john
|
||
cm ^du peter "mary collins"
|
||
cm ^deactivateuser john --^server=myserver:8084
|
||
cm ^deactivateuser S-1-5-21-3631250224-3045023395-1892523819-1107 --^nosolveuser
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_DIFF ==
|
||
Shows differences between files, changesets, and labels.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_DIFF ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^diff <csetspec> | <lbspec> | <shspec> [<csetspec> | <lbspec> | <shspec>]
|
||
[<path>]
|
||
[--^added] [--^changed] [--^moved] [--^deleted]
|
||
[--^repositorypaths] [--^download=<download_path>]
|
||
[--^encoding=<name>]
|
||
[--^comparisonmethod=(^ignoreeol | ^ignorewhitespaces |
|
||
^ignoreeolandwhitespaces | ^recognizeall)]
|
||
[--^clean]
|
||
[--^integration]
|
||
[--^format=<str_format>] [--^dateformat=<str_format>]
|
||
(Shows differences between a 'source' changeset or shelveset, and a
|
||
'destination' changeset or shelveset. The changesets can be specified
|
||
using either a changeset or label specification.
|
||
Where two specifications are given, the first will be the 'source' of
|
||
the diff; the second, the 'destination'.
|
||
If only one specification is given, the 'source' will be the parent
|
||
changeset of the specified 'destination'.
|
||
If an optional path is specified, the Diff window will launch to show
|
||
differences between the two revisions of that file.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^diff <revspec1> <revspec2>
|
||
(Shows differences between a pair of revisions. The differences are
|
||
shown in the Diff window. The first revision specified will appear on
|
||
the left.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^diff <brspec> [--^added] [--^changed] [--^moved] [--^deleted]
|
||
[--^repositorypaths] [--^download=<download_path>]
|
||
[--^encoding=<name>]
|
||
[--^comparisonmethod=(^ignoreeol | ^ignorewhitespaces |
|
||
^ignoreeolandwhitespaces | ^recognizeall)]
|
||
[--^clean]
|
||
[--^integration]
|
||
[--^format=<str_format>] [--^dateformat=<str_format>]
|
||
[--^fullpaths | --^fp]
|
||
(Shows the branch differences. Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more
|
||
about specs.)
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^added Prints only differences consisting of items added to
|
||
the repository.
|
||
--^changed Prints only differences consisting of items that
|
||
changed.
|
||
--^moved Prints only differences consisting of moved or renamed
|
||
items.
|
||
--^deleted Prints only differences consisting of items that were
|
||
deleted.
|
||
|
||
If '--^added', '--^changed', '--^moved' or '--^deleted' are
|
||
not specified, then the command prints all differences.
|
||
'^A' means added items.
|
||
'^C' means changed items.
|
||
'^D' means deleted items.
|
||
'^M' means moved items. The left item is the original,
|
||
the right is the destination.
|
||
|
||
--^repositorypaths Prints repository paths instead of workspace paths.
|
||
(This option overrides the '--^fullpaths' option.)
|
||
--^download Stores the differences content in the specified output
|
||
path.
|
||
--^encoding Specifies the output encoding, i.e.: utf-8.
|
||
See the MSDN documentation at
|
||
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
|
||
to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
|
||
(at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
|
||
--^comparisonmethod Sets the specified comparison method. See Remarks for more info.
|
||
--^clean Does not take into account the differences generated
|
||
because of a merge, but only the differences created by
|
||
simple checkins.
|
||
--^integration Shows the branch changes that are pending to be merged into
|
||
its parent branch. It takes into account any rebase or
|
||
prior merge already done from/to its parent branch.
|
||
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
|
||
Remarks for more info.
|
||
--^dateformat Format used to output dates.
|
||
--^fullpaths, --^fp Forces printing full workspace paths for files and
|
||
directories when possible.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_DIFF ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
Comparison methods (--^comparisonmethod option):
|
||
^ignoreeol Ignores the end of line differences.
|
||
^ignorewhitespaces Ignores the whitespace differences.
|
||
^ignoreeolandwhitespaces Ignores the end of line and whitespace differences.
|
||
^recognizeall Detects the end of line and whitespace differences.
|
||
|
||
This command accepts a format string to show the output.
|
||
The parameters of this command are the following:
|
||
{^path} Item path.
|
||
{^date} Change date/time.
|
||
{^owner} Change author.
|
||
{^revid} Revision id of the revision considered as the
|
||
destination in the diff.
|
||
{^parentrevid} Revision id of the parent of the revision considered
|
||
as the destination of the diff.
|
||
{^baserevid} Revision id of the revision considered as the source
|
||
in the diff.
|
||
{^srccmpath} Server path before moving the item (move operation).
|
||
{^dstcmpath} Server path after moving the item (move operation).
|
||
{^type} Item type:
|
||
^D directory,
|
||
^B binary file,
|
||
^F text file,
|
||
^S symlink,
|
||
^X Xlink.
|
||
{^repository} Repository of the item.
|
||
{^status} Item status:
|
||
^A added,
|
||
^D deleted,
|
||
^M moved,
|
||
^C changed.
|
||
{^fsprotection} Shows item permissions (Linux/Mac chmod).
|
||
{^srcfsprotection} Shows parent revision item permissions.
|
||
{^newline} Inserts a new line.
|
||
|
||
Notes on '^revid':
|
||
For added items, the '^baserevid' and '^parentrevid' will be -1, as no
|
||
previous revision exists in this case.
|
||
For deleted items, the '^revid' is the id of the source revision, and the
|
||
'^baserevid' will be -1, as there is no destination revision.
|
||
For Xlinks, both '^baserevid' and '^parentrevid' are always -1.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
Comparing branches:
|
||
|
||
cm ^diff ^br:/main/task001
|
||
cm ^diff ^br:/main/task001 \doc\readme.txt
|
||
cm ^diff ^br:/main/task001 --^integration
|
||
|
||
Comparing changeset trees:
|
||
|
||
cm ^diff 19
|
||
cm ^diff 19 25
|
||
cm ^diff ^cs:19 ^cs:25 --^format="{^path} {^parentrevid}"
|
||
cm ^diff ^cs:19 ^cs:23 --^format="{^date} {^path}" --^dateformat="yy/dd/MM HH:mm:ss"
|
||
cm ^diff ^cs:19 ^cs:23 --^changed
|
||
cm ^diff ^cs:19 ^cs:23 --^repositorypaths
|
||
cm ^diff ^cs:19 ^cs:23 --^download="D:\temp"
|
||
cm ^diff ^cs:19 ^cs:23 --^clean
|
||
cm ^diff ^cs:19 ^cs:23 \doc\readme.txt
|
||
|
||
Comparing label trees:
|
||
|
||
cm ^diff ^lb:FirstReleaseLabel ^lb:SecondReleaseLabel
|
||
cm ^diff ^lb:tag_193.2 ^cs:34214
|
||
cm ^diff ^cs:31492 ^lb:tag_193.2
|
||
|
||
Comparing shelve trees:
|
||
|
||
cm ^diff ^sh:2
|
||
cm ^diff ^sh:2 ^sh:4
|
||
|
||
Comparing revspecs:
|
||
|
||
cm ^diff ^rev:readme.txt#^cs:19 ^rev:readme.txt#^cs:20
|
||
cm ^diff ^serverpath:/doc/readme.txt#^cs:19@myrepo \
|
||
^serverpath:/doc/readme.txt#^br:/main@myrepo@localhost:8084
|
||
cm ^diff ^rev:foo.c#^cs:1 ^rev:foo.c#^cs:2 --^comparisonmethod=^ignoreeol
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_DIFFMETRICS ==
|
||
Shows diff metrics between two revs.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_DIFFMETRICS ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^diffmetrics | ^dm <revspec1> <revspec2> [--^format=<str_format>]
|
||
[--^encoding=<name>]
|
||
[--^comparisonmethod=(^ignoreeol | ^ignorewhitespaces |
|
||
^ignoreeolandwhitespaces | ^recognizeall)]
|
||
|
||
revspec Revisions used to compare.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about rev specs.)
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
|
||
Remarks for more info.
|
||
--^encoding Specifies the output encoding, i.e.: utf-8.
|
||
See the MSDN documentation at
|
||
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
|
||
to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
|
||
(at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
|
||
--^comparisonmethod Sets the specified comparison method.
|
||
See Remarks for more info.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_DIFFMETRICS ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
The metrics are: number of changed, added, and deleted lines.
|
||
|
||
Output format parameters (--^format option):
|
||
This command accepts a format string to show the output.
|
||
The output parameters of this command are the following:
|
||
{0} Number of changed lines.
|
||
{1} Number of added lines.
|
||
{2} Number of deleted lines.
|
||
|
||
Comparison methods (--^comparisonmethod option):
|
||
^ignoreeol Ignores the end of line differences.
|
||
^ignorewhitespaces Ignores the whitespace differences.
|
||
^ignoreeolandwhitespaces Ignores the end of line and whitespace differences.
|
||
^recognizeall Detects the end of line and whitespace differences.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^diffmetrics file.txt#^cs:2 file.txt#^br:/main/scm0211 \
|
||
--^format="There are {0} changed, {1} added and {2} deleted lines."
|
||
(Retrieves diffmetrics results formatted.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^dm file.txt#^cs:2 file.txt#^cs:3 --^encoding=utf-8 --^comparisonmethod=^ignorewhitespaces
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_FASTEXPORT ==
|
||
Exports a repository in fast-export format.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_FASTEXPORT ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^fast-export | ^fe <repspec> <fast-export-file>
|
||
[--^import-marks=<marks_file>]
|
||
[--^export-marks=<marks_file>]
|
||
[--^branchseparator=<chr_separator>]
|
||
[--^nodata] [--^from=<changesetid>] [--^to=<changesetid>]
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
repspec The repository which the data will be exported from.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about rep specs.)
|
||
fast-export-file The file with the repository data in Git fast-export
|
||
format.
|
||
--^import-marks The marks file used for incremental imports. This file
|
||
has been previously exported by '--^export-marks'. The
|
||
changesets described in this file will not be imported
|
||
because they were already in a previous import.
|
||
--^export-marks The file where the imported changesets will be saved.
|
||
This file is used in a later fast-import to signal the
|
||
changesets that have been already imported.
|
||
--^branchseparator Unity VCS uses "/" as default separator in the branch
|
||
hierarchy. This option allows using char as a hierarchy
|
||
separator, so main-task-sub would be mapped in Unity VCS
|
||
as /main/task/sub.
|
||
--^nodata Exports the repository without including the data. This
|
||
is useful to check if the export will run correctly.
|
||
--^from Exports from a particular changeset.
|
||
--^to Exports to a particular changeset.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_FASTEXPORT ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
- To import a Unity VCS repository to Git, use a command such as:
|
||
^cat repo.fe.00 | ^git ^fast-import --^export-marks=marks.git --^import-marks=marks.git
|
||
|
||
- Incremental export is supported using a marks file that contains the
|
||
changesets previously imported ('--^import-marks' and '--^export-marks'
|
||
files).
|
||
This means that only the new changesets that were not exported in the
|
||
previous fast-export will be exported.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^fast-export repo@localhost:8087 repo.fe.00 --^import-marks=marks.cm \
|
||
--^export-marks=marks.cm
|
||
(Exports the repository 'repo' in the local server into the 'repo.fe.00'
|
||
file in Git fast-export format and creates the marks files to perform
|
||
incremental exports later.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^fast-export repo@localhost:8087 repo.fe.00 --^from=20
|
||
(Exports the repository 'repo' in the local server into the 'repo.fe.00'
|
||
file in Git fast-export format from changeset '20'.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_FASTIMPORT ==
|
||
Imports Git fast-export data into a repository.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_FASTIMPORT ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^fast-import | ^fi <repspec> <fast-export-file>
|
||
[--^import-marks=<marks_file>]
|
||
[--^export-marks=<marks_file>]
|
||
[--^stats] [--^branchseparator=<chr_separator>]
|
||
[--^nodata] [--^ignoremissingchangesets] [--^mastertomain]
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
repspec The repository into which the data will be
|
||
imported. It is created if it did not previously
|
||
exist. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more
|
||
about rep specs.)
|
||
fast-export-file The file with the repository data in Git
|
||
fast-export format.
|
||
--^import-marks The marks file used for incremental imports.
|
||
This file has been previously exported by
|
||
'--^export-marks'. The changesets described in
|
||
this file wont be imported because they
|
||
were already in a previous import.
|
||
--^export-marks The file where the imported changesets will
|
||
be saved. This file is used in a later
|
||
fast-import to signal the changesets that have
|
||
been already imported.
|
||
--^stats Prints some statistics about the import process.
|
||
--^branchseparator Unity VCS uses "/" as default separator in
|
||
the branch hierarchy. This option allows using
|
||
char as a hierarchy separator, so main-task-sub
|
||
would be mapped in Unity VCS as /main/task/sub.
|
||
--^nodata Imports Git fast-export without including the
|
||
data. This is useful to check if the import will
|
||
run correctly.
|
||
--^ignoremissingchangesets Any changesets that cannot be imported are
|
||
discarded and the fast-import operation
|
||
continues without them.
|
||
--^mastertomain Imports using "^main" instead of "^master".
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_FASTIMPORT ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
- To export a Git repository, use a command such as:
|
||
^git ^fast-export --^all -^M --^signed-tags=^strip --^tag-of-filtered-object=^drop> ..\git-fast-export.dat
|
||
The -^M option is important to detect moved items.
|
||
|
||
- The specified repository is created in case it did not exist.
|
||
|
||
- Incremental import is supported using a marks file that contains the
|
||
changesets previously imported ('--^import-marks' and '--^export-marks'
|
||
files).
|
||
This means that only the new changesets that were not imported in the
|
||
previous fast-import will be imported.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^fast-import mynewrepo@atenea:8084 repo.fast-export
|
||
(Imports the contents exported in the 'repo.fast-export' file into
|
||
'mynewrepo' repository on server 'atenea:8084'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^fast-import repo@atenea:8084 repo.fast-export --^export-marks=rep.marks
|
||
(Imports the contents exported in the 'repo.fast-export' file into
|
||
'repo' repository on server 'atenea:8084' and creates a marks file
|
||
to perform incremental imports later.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^fast-import repo@server:8084 repo.fast-export --^import-marks=repo.marks \
|
||
--^export-marks=repo.marks
|
||
(Imports the contents of the 'repo.fast-export' file. Only the new
|
||
changesets that were not in the marks file are imported. The same marks
|
||
file is used to save the list of changesets again for the next
|
||
incremental import.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_FILEINFO ==
|
||
Retrieves detailed information about the items in the workspace.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_FILEINFO ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^fileinfo <item_path>[ ...] [--^fields=<field_value>[,...]]
|
||
[[--^xml | -^x [=<output_file>]] | [--^format=<str_format>]]
|
||
[--^symlink] [--^encoding=<name>]
|
||
|
||
item_path Items to display. Use a whitespace to separate the items.
|
||
Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths containing spaces.
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^fields A string of comma-separated values. This selects which
|
||
fields will be printed for each item. See Remarks for
|
||
more information.
|
||
--^xml | -^x Prints the output in XML format to the standard output.
|
||
It is possible to specify an output file. This option
|
||
cannot be combined with '--^format'.
|
||
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
|
||
Remarks for more info. This option cannot be combined
|
||
with '--^xml'.
|
||
This '--^format' option prevails over '--^fields' if both
|
||
are specified.
|
||
--^symlink Applies the fileinfo operation to the symlink and not
|
||
to the target.
|
||
--^encoding Specifies the output encoding, i.e.: utf-8.
|
||
See the MSDN documentation at
|
||
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
|
||
to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
|
||
(at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
|
||
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_FILEINFO ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
This command prints a detailed list of attributes for each selected item.
|
||
Each attribute is printed on a new line by default.
|
||
|
||
The attribute list can be modified to display only the attributes the user
|
||
needs. This can be achieved using the '--^fields=<field_list>' which accepts
|
||
a string of comma-separated attribute names. This way, only those arguments
|
||
whose name has been indicated are shown.
|
||
|
||
Revision head changeset:
|
||
|
||
This option is disabled by default. Please note that retrieving this
|
||
attribute is significantly slower than the rest of them, so we advise users
|
||
to group together as many items as possible. This will improve execution
|
||
times by avoiding many separate 'cm ^fileinfo' executions.
|
||
Also, this feature is not currently available for controlled directories.
|
||
|
||
You can find below the complete list of available attribute names.
|
||
Names marked with an asterisk ('*') will not be shown by default:
|
||
^ClientPath The local path on disk for the item.
|
||
^RelativePath The workspace-relative path.
|
||
^ServerPath The repository path for the item.
|
||
(Note: Transformed workspaces are not
|
||
currently supported for this option).
|
||
^Size Item size.
|
||
^Hash Item hash sum.
|
||
^Owner The user the item belongs to.
|
||
^RevisionHeadChangeset (*) The changeset of the revision loaded in the
|
||
head changeset of the branch.
|
||
(Please see note above.)
|
||
^RevisionChangeset The changeset of the revision currently loaded
|
||
in the workspace.
|
||
^RepSpec The repository specification for the item.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about
|
||
rep specs.)
|
||
^Status The workspace item status: added, checked out,
|
||
deleted, etc.
|
||
^Type Revision type (text, binary, directory, symlink,
|
||
or unknown).
|
||
^Changelist The changelist the item belongs to (if any).
|
||
^IsLocked (*) Whether the item is locked by exclusive
|
||
checkout or not.
|
||
^LockedBy (*) The user who exclusively checked out the item.
|
||
^LockedWhere (*) The location where the item was exclusively
|
||
checked out.
|
||
^IsUnderXlink Whether the item is located under an Xlink
|
||
or not.
|
||
^UnderXlinkTarget The target of the Xlink the item is under
|
||
(if any).
|
||
^UnderXlinkPath The item server path in the Xlinked repository
|
||
(if any).
|
||
^UnderXlinkWritable Whether the Xlink the item belongs to is
|
||
writable or not.
|
||
^UnderXlinkRelative Whether the Xlink the items belongs to is
|
||
relative or not.
|
||
^IsXlink Whether the item itself is a Xlink or not.
|
||
^XlinkTarget The target repository the item points to, if it
|
||
is a Xlink.
|
||
^XlinkName The Xlink name of the item, if it is
|
||
actually one.
|
||
^XlinkWritable Whether the Xlink item is a writable Xlink
|
||
or not.
|
||
^XlinkRelative Whether the Xlink item is a relative Xlink
|
||
or not.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Output format parameters (--^format option):
|
||
This command accepts a format string to show the output.
|
||
The output parameters of this command are the following:
|
||
{^ClientPath}
|
||
{^RelativePath}
|
||
{^ServerPath}
|
||
{^Size}
|
||
{^Hash}
|
||
{^Owner}
|
||
{^RevisionHeadChangeset}
|
||
{^RevisionChangeset}
|
||
{^Status}
|
||
{^Type}
|
||
{^Changelist}
|
||
{^IsLocked}
|
||
{^LockedBy}
|
||
{^LockedWhere}
|
||
{^IsUnderXlink}
|
||
{^UnderXlinkTarget}
|
||
{^UnderXlinkPath}
|
||
{^UnderXlinkWritable}
|
||
{^UnderXlinkRelative}
|
||
{^IsXlink}
|
||
{^XlinkTarget}
|
||
{^XlinkName}
|
||
{^XlinkWritable}
|
||
{^XlinkRelative}
|
||
{^RepSpec}
|
||
|
||
Please note that '--^format' and '--^xml' options are mutually exclusive, so
|
||
they can't be used at the same time.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^fileinfo file1.txt file2.txt dir/
|
||
cm ^fileinfo "New Project.csproj" --^xml
|
||
cm ^fileinfo assets.art --^fields=^ServerPath,^Size,^IsLocked,^LockedBy
|
||
cm ^fileinfo proj_specs.docx --^fields=^ServerPath,^RevisionChangeset --^xml
|
||
cm ^fileinfo samples.ogg --^format="{^ServerPath}[{^Owner}] -> {^Size}"
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_FIND_QUERY ==
|
||
Runs SQL-like queries to find Unity VCS objects.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_FIND_QUERY ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^find <object_type>
|
||
[^where <str_conditions>]
|
||
[^on ^repository '<repspec>' | ^on ^repositories '<repspec1>','<repspec2>'[,...]]
|
||
[^order ^by <sort_field> ['^asc' | '^desc']]
|
||
[[^limit <maxresults>] [^offset <offset>]]
|
||
[--^format=<str_format>] [--^dateformat=<date_format>]
|
||
[--^nototal] [--^file=<dump_file>] [--^xml]
|
||
[--^encoding=<name>]
|
||
|
||
object_type Object type to find.
|
||
Some of these objects are implementing the '^order ^by' clause.
|
||
Use 'cm ^help ^showfindobjects' to learn how to specify these
|
||
objects, the ones allowing '^order ^by' and by what fields.
|
||
You can also read the 'cm ^find' guide:
|
||
https://www.plasticscm.com/download/help/cmfind
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
str_conditions Searches conditions on an object attributes.
|
||
repspec Searches repositories alias or specification.
|
||
In the case of '^on ^repositories', use a comma to
|
||
separate the repspec fields.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repository
|
||
specifications.)
|
||
sort_field The name of the field to use as sorting field. Mind there is only
|
||
a subset of field possibilities. Use 'cm ^help ^showfindobjects'
|
||
to find what objects are allowed to be ordered and by what fields.
|
||
maxresults The maximun number of results returned by the query.
|
||
offset The number of rows to skip before starting to return results
|
||
from the query.
|
||
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format.
|
||
Read the 'cm ^find' guide to see all the object
|
||
attributes that can be used as output format strings:
|
||
https://www.plasticscm.com/download/help/cmfind
|
||
--^dateformat Format used to output dates.
|
||
--^nototal Does not output record count at the end.
|
||
--^file File to dump results.
|
||
--^xml Prints the output in XML format to the standard output.
|
||
--^encoding Specifies the output encoding, i.e.: utf-8.
|
||
See the MSDN documentation at
|
||
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
|
||
to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
|
||
(at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_FIND_QUERY ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
If no repository is specified, the search is made on the repository
|
||
configured in the workspace.
|
||
|
||
When you run queries using comparison operators (>, <, >=, <=) from the
|
||
command line, remember that the shell considers these operators as IO
|
||
redirections. So you will need to enclose the queries in double quotation
|
||
marks.
|
||
|
||
The 'cm ^find' command accepts a format string to show the output.
|
||
Each output parameter is identified by a string and the user can refer it
|
||
by typing the parameter number between '{' and '}' brackets.
|
||
Output parameters usually correspond to the attributes of the object.
|
||
|
||
These are some valid output format strings:
|
||
--^format={^id}{^date}{^name}
|
||
--^format="{^item}#{^branch} ^with ^date {^date}"
|
||
|
||
XML and encoding considerations:
|
||
|
||
When the '--^xml' option is specified, the command shows the command result
|
||
as an XML text in the standard output. The operating system default encoding
|
||
is used to show the text, so it is possible that not-ANSI characters are
|
||
incorrectly visualized in the console. If you redirect the command output to
|
||
a file, it will be correctly visualized. When both '--^xml' and '--^file'
|
||
options are specified, the default encoding will be utf-8.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^find ^revision
|
||
cm ^find ^revision "^where ^changeset=23 ^and ^owner='maria'"
|
||
cm ^find ^branch "^on ^repository 'rep1'"
|
||
cm ^find ^label "^on ^repositories 'rep1', '^rep:default@localhost:8084'"
|
||
cm ^find ^branch "^where ^parent='^br:/main' ^on ^repository 'rep1'"
|
||
cm ^find ^revision "^where ^item='^item:.'" --^format="{^item}#{^branch}"
|
||
cm ^find ^revision "^where ^item='^item:.'" --^xml --^file=c:\queryresults\revs.xml
|
||
cm ^find ^label "^where ^owner='^me' ^limit 10 ^offset 20"
|
||
cm ^find ^branches "^where ^owner='^me' ^order ^by ^branchname ^desc ^limit 10"
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_FINDCHANGED ==
|
||
Gets a list of changed files. This command is deprecated and kept just for
|
||
backwards compatibility. Use 'cm ^status' instead.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_FINDCHANGED ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^findchanged | ^fc [-^R | -^r | --^recursive] [--^checkcontent]
|
||
[--^onlychanged] [<path>]
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
-^R Recursively finds in directories.
|
||
--^checkcontent Compares files by content.
|
||
--^onlychanged Finds only changed files; checkouts will not be
|
||
obtained.
|
||
path (Default: current directory.)
|
||
Initial path to find changed files.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_FINDCHANGED ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
If no '--^checkcontent' option is given, Unity VCS finds changes based on
|
||
the file timestamp.
|
||
When '--^checkcontent' option is specified, the file or folder contents are
|
||
compared, instead of using the timestamp.
|
||
|
||
This command is useful to detect changed files while disconnected from
|
||
the Unity VCS server. The output can be piped to the ^checkout command,
|
||
to check the changes later (see examples).
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^findchanged .
|
||
(Finds changed files in the current directory.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^findchanged -^R . | cm ^checkout -
|
||
(Checkouts changed elements.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_FINDCHECKEDOUT ==
|
||
Gets a list of checked out items. This command is deprecated and kept just for
|
||
backwards compatibility. Use 'cm ^status' instead.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_FINDCHECKEDOUT ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^findcheckouts | ^fco [--^format=<str_format>] [--^basepath]
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
|
||
Remarks for more info.
|
||
--^basepath The path to start searching checkouts from. If not
|
||
specified, the current path is used.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_FINDCHECKEDOUT ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
This command is useful to checkin or undocheckout all checked out items in
|
||
one single step, redirecting the standard output to other command.
|
||
See examples.
|
||
|
||
Output format parameters (--^format option):
|
||
This command accepts a format string to show the output.
|
||
The output parameters of this command are the following:
|
||
{0} Date.
|
||
{1} Owner.
|
||
{2} Workspace info.
|
||
{3} Client machine name.
|
||
{4} Item path.
|
||
{5} Branch and repository info.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^findcheckouts --^format="File {4} changed on branch {5}"
|
||
(Finds checked out items and formats the output with file path and branch
|
||
and repository info.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^findcheckouts --^format={4} | cm ^checkin -
|
||
(Checkins all checked out items.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^findcheckouts --^format={4} | cm ^undocheckout -
|
||
(Undocheckouts of all checked out items.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_FINDPRIVATE ==
|
||
Gets a list of private items. This command is deprecated and kept just for
|
||
backwards compatibility. Use 'cm ^status' instead.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_FINDPRIVATE ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
cm ^findprivate | ^fp [-^R | -^r | --^recursive] [--^exclusions] [<path>]
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
-^R Recursively finds in directories.
|
||
--^exclusions This option allows cutting the search inside the ignored
|
||
paths, defined by the file ignore.conf.
|
||
path (Default: current directory.)
|
||
Initial path to find private files.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_FINDPRIVATE ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
If any path is specified, Unity VCS will begin searching from the
|
||
current directory.
|
||
|
||
This command is useful to add private items on a folder, piping the output
|
||
to the '^add' command. See examples.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^findprivate .
|
||
|
||
cm ^findprivate -^R | cm ^add -
|
||
(Recursively searches private items and add them.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_GETCONFIG ==
|
||
Obtains configuration info.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_GETCONFIG ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^getconfig [^setfileasreadonly] [^location] [^extensionworkingmode]
|
||
[^extensionprefix] [^defaultrepserver]
|
||
|
||
^setfileasreadonly Returns whether the protected files are left as
|
||
read-only or not.
|
||
^location Returns the client config path.
|
||
^extensionworkingmode Returns the extension working mode.
|
||
^extensionprefix Returns the configured extension prefix.
|
||
^defaultrepserver Returns the location of the default repository
|
||
server.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_GETCONFIG ==
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^getconfig ^setfileasreadonly
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_GETFILE ==
|
||
Downloads the content of a given revision.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_GETFILE ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^getfile | ^cat <revspec> [--^file=<output_file>] [--^debug]
|
||
[--^symlink] [--^raw]
|
||
|
||
revspec Object specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn
|
||
more about specs.)
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^file File to save the output. By default, it is printed on the
|
||
standard output.
|
||
--^debug When a directory specification is used, the command
|
||
shows all the items in the directory, its revision id
|
||
and file system protection.
|
||
--^symlink Applies the operation to the symlink and not to the
|
||
target.
|
||
--^raw Displays the raw data of the file.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_GETFILE ==
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^cat myfile.txt#^br:/main
|
||
(Obtains the last revision in branch '^br:/main' of 'myfile.txt'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^getfile myfile.txt#^cs:3 --^file=tmp.txt
|
||
(Obtains the changeset 3 of 'myfile.txt' and write it to file 'tmp.txt'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^cat ^serverpath:/src/foo.c#^br:/main/task003@myrepo
|
||
(Obtains the contents of '/src/foo.c' at the last changeset of branch
|
||
'/main/task003' in repository 'myrepo'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^cat ^revid:1230@^rep:myrep@^repserver:myserver:8084
|
||
(Obtains the revision with id 1230.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^getfile ^rev:info\ --^debug
|
||
(Obtains all revisions in the 'info' directory.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_GETREVISION ==
|
||
Loads a revision in the workspace.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_GETREVISION ==
|
||
This command modifies the revision loaded in the workspace, so it can affect
|
||
future merges.
|
||
It is an advanced command inherited from old versions, so use it with care.
|
||
|
||
Usage:
|
||
cm ^getrevision <revspec>
|
||
|
||
revspec Object specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn
|
||
more about rev specs.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_GETREVISION ==
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^getrevision file.txt#^cs:3
|
||
(Gets changeset 3 revision of 'file.txt'.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_GETSTATUS ==
|
||
Gets the status of an item.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_GETSTATUS ==
|
||
This is an automation command, meant to be used to automate 'cm' only.
|
||
It is not as user-friendly as it should be.
|
||
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^getstatus | ^gs <item_path>[ ...] [--^format=<str_format>] [--^stats]
|
||
[-^R | -^r | --^recursive]
|
||
|
||
item_path Item or items to get status from. Use double quotes
|
||
(" ") to specify paths containing spaces. Use a
|
||
whitespace to separate paths.
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
|
||
Remarks for more info.
|
||
--^stats Prints some statistics about the get status process.
|
||
-^R Shows recursively the status in directories.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_GETSTATUS ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
Output format parameters (--^format option):
|
||
This command accepts a format string to show the output.
|
||
The output parameters of this command are the following:
|
||
{0} Item path.
|
||
{1} Item status:
|
||
0 private,
|
||
1 checked in,
|
||
2 checked out.
|
||
|
||
Reading input from stdin:
|
||
|
||
The '^getstatus' command can read paths from stdin. To do this, pass a
|
||
single dash "-".
|
||
Example: cm ^getstatus -
|
||
|
||
Paths will be read until an empty line is entered.
|
||
This allows you to use pipe to specify which paths to get the status for.
|
||
Example:
|
||
dir /S /B *.c | cm ^getstatus --^format="Path {0} Status {1}" -
|
||
(In Windows, gets the status of all .c files in the workspace.)
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^getstatus file1.txt file2.txt
|
||
(Gets the status of the files.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^gs info\ -^R --^format="The item {0} has the status {1}"
|
||
(Gets the status of the directory and all of its items and shows a
|
||
formatted output.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_GETTASKBRANCHES ==
|
||
Gets branches linked with a task.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_GETTASKBRANCHES ==
|
||
This is an automation command, meant to be used to automate 'cm' only.
|
||
It is not as user-friendly as it should be.
|
||
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^gettaskbranches | ^gtb <task_name> [--^format=<str_format>]
|
||
[--^dateformat=<date_format>]
|
||
|
||
task_name The task identifier.
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
|
||
Remarks for more info.
|
||
--^dateformat Format used to output dates.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_GETTASKBRANCHES ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
Output format parameters (--^format option):
|
||
This command accepts a format string to show the output.
|
||
The output parameters of this command are the following:
|
||
{^tab} Inserts a tab space.
|
||
{^newline} Inserts a new line.
|
||
{^name} Branch name.
|
||
{^owner} Owner of the branch.
|
||
{^date} Date when the branch was created.
|
||
{^parent} Parent branch.
|
||
{^comment} Comment of the branch.
|
||
{^repname} Repository where the branch exists.
|
||
{^repserver} Server name.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^gettaskbranches 4311
|
||
cm ^gtb 4311 --^format="^br:{^name}"
|
||
cm ^gtb 4311 --^format="^br:{^name} {^date}" --^dateformat="yyyy/MM/dd HH:mm:ss"
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_GETWWI ==
|
||
Shows info about the workspace selector.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_GETWWI ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^workspaceinfo | ^wi [<wk_path>]
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
wk_path Path of a workspace on the machine.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_GETWWI ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
The '^wi' command shows the working configuration of a workspace (repository,
|
||
branch, and/or label).
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
cm ^wi c:\mywk
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_GWP ==
|
||
Gets workspace info from a path.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_GWP ==
|
||
This is an automation command, meant to be used to automate 'cm' only.
|
||
It is not as user-friendly as it should be.
|
||
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^getworkspacefrompath | ^gwp <item_path> [--^format=<str_format>] [--^extended]
|
||
|
||
item_path File or folder on disk.
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
|
||
Remarks for more info.
|
||
--^extended Displays more information regarding the workspace: ^type
|
||
and ^dynamic on top of the others. See Remarks for more info.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_GWP ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
This command shows information about the workspace that is located in path.
|
||
|
||
Output format parameters (--^format option):
|
||
This command accepts a format string to show the output.
|
||
The output parameters of this command are the following:
|
||
{0} | {^wkname} Workspace name.
|
||
{1} | {^wkpath} Workspace path.
|
||
{2} | {^machine} Client machine name.
|
||
{3} | {^owner} Workspace owner.
|
||
{4} | {^guid} Workspace GUID.
|
||
{5} | {^type} Workspace type: partial (gluon) or regular.
|
||
{6} | {^dynamic} A workspace can be dynamic (plasticfs) or static.
|
||
|
||
{^tab} Inserts a tab space.
|
||
{^newline} Inserts a new line.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^gwp c:\myworkspace\code\file1.cpp --^format="Workspace name: {^wkname}"
|
||
cm ^gwp . --^format="Name: {^wkname} | Type: {^type}, {^dynamic}"
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_HELP ==
|
||
Gets help for a Unity VCS command.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_HELP ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^help <command>
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_HELP ==
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_IOSTATS ==
|
||
Shows statistics about the hardware.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_IOSTATS ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^iostats [<repserverspec>] [<list_of_tests>[ ...]]
|
||
[--^nettotalmb=<value_mb>] [--^networkiterations=<value_iter>]
|
||
[--^diskdatasize=<value_size>] [--^disktestpath=<value_path>]
|
||
[--^systemdisplaytime=<value_time>]
|
||
[--^systemdisplaytimeinterval=<value_interval>]
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
repserverspec An available Unity VCS server to perform
|
||
the network tests, such as "serverUploadTest"
|
||
and/ or "serverDownloadTest".
|
||
If no server is provided, the command tries
|
||
to communicate with the server configured by
|
||
default.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about
|
||
server specs.)
|
||
list_of_tests Available tests. Use a whitespace to separate
|
||
test fields.
|
||
See Remarks for more info.
|
||
--^nettotalmb Indicates the amount of user data (in
|
||
MegaBytes) transmitted on a network test,
|
||
such as "^serverDownloadTest" or
|
||
"^serverUploadTest".
|
||
It must be a value between "4" and "512".
|
||
(Default: 16)
|
||
--^networkiterations Indicates the number of iterations of
|
||
"^serverDownloadTest" and/or "^serverUploadTest"
|
||
that will be run.
|
||
It must be a value between "1" and "100".
|
||
(Default: 1)
|
||
--^diskdatasize Indicates the amount of data (in MegaBytes)
|
||
that will be written and then read on the
|
||
"^diskTest".
|
||
It must be a value between "100" and "4096".
|
||
(Default: 512)
|
||
--^disktestpath Path where the "^diskTest" writes the test
|
||
files. If this parameter is not provided,
|
||
the command will try to use the system temp
|
||
path.
|
||
--^systemdisplaytime Time interval (in seconds) showing the usage
|
||
of system resources. This option is available
|
||
for the following tests: "^systemNetworkUsage"
|
||
and "^systemDiskUsage".
|
||
It must be a value between "1" and "3600".
|
||
(Default: 5 seconds).
|
||
--^systemdisplaytimeinterval Time interval (in seconds) between the
|
||
system performance samples. This option is
|
||
available for the following tests:
|
||
"^systemNetworkUsage" and "^systemDiskUsage".
|
||
It must be a value between "1" and "60".
|
||
(Default: 1 second).
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_IOSTATS ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
This command requires an available server be used during the network
|
||
speed tests ("^serverUploadTest" and/or "^serverDownloadTest").
|
||
|
||
The '--^diskTestPath' must point to a path that belongs to the physical
|
||
disk drive about to be tested. If no path is specified, the command tries
|
||
to use the system default temp path.
|
||
The disk drive of the specified path must have enough free space to execute
|
||
the test.
|
||
|
||
During the command execution, the system can experience a degraded
|
||
performance caused by the tests performed.
|
||
|
||
Available tests:
|
||
--^serveruploadtest (Default) Measures the data upload speed from
|
||
Unity VCS client to the server.
|
||
--^serverdownloadtest (Default) Measures the data download speed from
|
||
Unity VCS server to the client.
|
||
--^disktest (Default) Measures the disk read speed and disk
|
||
write speed.
|
||
--^systemnetworkusage Shows the current usage of system network
|
||
resources.
|
||
(It shows Network Interface performance counters
|
||
provided by Microsoft Windows).
|
||
Available in Microsoft Windows only.
|
||
--^systemdiskusage Shows the current usage of system physical
|
||
disks.
|
||
(It shows Network Interface performance counters
|
||
provided by Microsoft Windows).
|
||
Available in Microsoft Windows only.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^iostats MYSERVER:8087 --^serveruploadtest --^serverdownloadtest --^nettotalmb=32
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_ISSUETRACKER ==
|
||
Gets, updates, or finds the issue status in the specified issue tracker.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_ISSUETRACKER ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^issuetracker <name> ^status ^get <task_id> <parameter>[ ...]
|
||
cm ^issuetracker <name> ^status ^update <task_id> <status> <parameter>[ ...]
|
||
cm ^issuetracker <name> ^status ^find <status> <parameter>[ ...]
|
||
cm ^issuetracker <name> ^connection ^check <parameter>[ ...]
|
||
|
||
name Name of the issue tracker to connect with.
|
||
Only Jira is supported at the moment.
|
||
task_id Number of the issue to query or update.
|
||
^status A valid status for an issue in the issue tracker.
|
||
|
||
Jira parameters (all are mandatory):
|
||
|
||
--^user=<user> The user to authenticate.
|
||
--^password=<password> The password to authenticate.
|
||
--^host=<url> The target url of the issue tracker.
|
||
--^projectkey=<key> The project key of Jira project.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_ISSUETRACKER ==
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^issuetracker jira ^status ^get 11 --^user=user@mail.es --^password=pwd \
|
||
--^host=https://user.atlassian.net --^projectkey=PRJ
|
||
(Gets the status of the issue 11 for the 'PRJ' project.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^issuetracker jira ^status ^update 11 "Done" --^user=user@mail.es \
|
||
--^password=pwd --^host=https://user.atlassian.net --^projectkey=PRJ
|
||
(Updates the status to 'Done' of the issue 11 for the 'PRJ' project.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^issuetracker jira ^status ^find "Done" --^user=user@mail.es --^password=pwd \
|
||
--^host=https://user.atlassian.net --^projectkey=PRJ
|
||
(Gets the task ids whose status is set to 'Done' for the 'PRJ' project.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^issuetracker jira ^connection ^check --^user=user@mail.es --^password=pwd \
|
||
--^host=https://user.atlassian.net --^projectkey=PRJ
|
||
(Checks whether the configuration parameters are valid or not.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_LICENSEINFO ==
|
||
Displays license information and license usage.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_LICENSEINFO ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^licenseinfo | ^li [--^server=<repserverspec>] [--^inactive] [--^active]
|
||
[--^sort=(^name|^status)]
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^server Gets the license info from the specified server.
|
||
If no server is specified, executes the command on the
|
||
one configured on the client.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repserver
|
||
specs.)
|
||
--^inactive Shows only inactive users in the "license usage" section.
|
||
--^active Shows only active users in the "license usage" section.
|
||
--^sort Sorts users by one of the specified sort options:
|
||
'^name' or '^status'.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_LICENSEINFO ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
The information displayed consists of expiration date, activated and
|
||
deactivated users, etc.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^licenseinfo
|
||
cm ^licenseinfo --^server=myserver:8084
|
||
cm ^licenseinfo --^sort=^name
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_LINKTASK ==
|
||
Links a changeset to a task.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_LINKTASK ==
|
||
This is an automation command, meant to be used to automate 'cm' only.
|
||
It is not as user friendly as it should be.
|
||
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^linktask | ^lt <csetspec> <ext_prefix> <task_name>
|
||
|
||
csetspec The full changeset specification to link to a task.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about changeset
|
||
specs.)
|
||
ext_prefix The extension prefix of the configured issue tracking
|
||
system to work with.
|
||
task_name The task identifier on the issue tracking system.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_LINKTASK ==
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^lt ^cs:8@^rep:default@^repserver:localhost:8084 jira PRJ-1
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_LOCK_LIST ==
|
||
Shows locks on a server.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_LOCK_LIST ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^lock ^list | ^ls [<revspec> [ ...]] [--^server=<server>]
|
||
[--^onlycurrentuser] [--^onlycurrentworkspace]
|
||
[--^ignorecase]
|
||
[--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
|
||
[--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
|
||
|
||
revspec If one or more are present, this command will display
|
||
one lock line for each specified revision if its
|
||
associated item is locked in the server. Otherwise,
|
||
this command will list all locked items in the default
|
||
server (or the one set with the '--^server' option).
|
||
Use a whitespace to separate the rev specs when using
|
||
more than one.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about rev specs.)
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^server Repository server specification.
|
||
This option will override the default server which
|
||
is retrieved from the current workspace or the
|
||
client.conf file.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about
|
||
server specs.)
|
||
--^onlycurrentuser Filters the results showing only the locks performed
|
||
by the current user.
|
||
--^onlycurrentworkspace Filters the results showing only the locks performed
|
||
on the current workspace (matching them by name).
|
||
--^ignorecase Ignores casing on the paths when a serverpath spec
|
||
is used. With this flag, the command will work for
|
||
"/src/foo.c" even if the user writes "/sRc/fOO.c".
|
||
--^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
|
||
--^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
|
||
the lines should start.
|
||
--^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
|
||
the lines should end.
|
||
--^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
|
||
the fields should be separated.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_LOCK_LIST ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
The command will display a list of the currently locked items in the
|
||
default server. It also accepts a list of revision specifications. In this
|
||
case, only the locks belonging to the selected items will be displayed.
|
||
A '--^server=<server>' can be used to set the default server to query.
|
||
|
||
The command shows a line for every lock in the specified server:
|
||
- GUID of the locked item.
|
||
- User name who performed the lock.
|
||
- Workspace name where the lock was performed.
|
||
- Path of the locked item (server path format).
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^lock ^list
|
||
cm ^lock ^list --^server=myserver:8084
|
||
cm ^lock ^ls ^serverpath:/src/foo.c#^cs:99@default@localhost:8084
|
||
cm ^lock ^list ^revid:3521@default ^itemid:2381@secondary --^onlycurrentuser
|
||
cm ^lock ^ls --^onlycurrentuser
|
||
cm ^lock ^ls --^onlycurrentuser --^onlycurrentworkspace
|
||
cm ^lock ^list --^machinereadable --^startlineseparator=">" \
|
||
--^endlineseparator="<" --^fieldseparator=","
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_LISTUSERS ==
|
||
Lists users and groups.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_LISTUSERS ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^listusers | ^lu <repserverspec> [--^onlyusers] [--^onlygroups]
|
||
[--^filter=<str_filter>]
|
||
cm ^listusers | ^lu <repserverspec> --^group=<group_name>
|
||
|
||
repserverspec Repository server specification.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^onlyusers Lists only users.
|
||
--^onlygroups Lists only groups.
|
||
--^filter Lists only users and/or groups that matches the
|
||
specified filter.
|
||
--^group Lists only users from a certain group. This option is
|
||
not compatible with ^onlyusers, ^onlygroups, nor ^filter.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_LISTUSERS ==
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^lu localhost:8084
|
||
(Lists all users in the server.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^listusers localhost:8084 --^onlyusers --^filter=m
|
||
(Lists only the users in the server that contains "m".)
|
||
|
||
cm ^listusers codice@cloud --^group=Administrators
|
||
(Lists only the users in the group Administrators in the 'codice@cloud' org.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_LOCATION ==
|
||
Returns the path of 'cm'.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_LOCATION ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^location
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_LOCATION ==
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_LOCK ==
|
||
This command allows the user to manage locks.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_LOCK ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^lock <command> [options]
|
||
|
||
Commands:
|
||
|
||
^list | ^ls
|
||
^unlock
|
||
|
||
To get more information about each command run:
|
||
cm ^lock <command> --^usage
|
||
cm ^lock <command> --^help
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_LOCK ==
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^lock ^list
|
||
cm ^lock
|
||
(The option '^list' is optional if there are no arguments.)
|
||
cm ^lock ^ls ^serverpath:/src/foo.c#^cs:99@default@localhost:8084
|
||
cm ^lock ^unlock 91961b14-3dfe-4062-8c4c-f33a81d201f5
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_LOG ==
|
||
Gets info about revisions in changesets.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_LOG ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^log [<csetspec> | <repspec>] [--^from=<csetspec_from>] [--^allbranches]
|
||
[--^ancestors] [--^csformat=<str_format>] [--^itemformat=<str_format>]
|
||
[--^xml[=<output_file>]] [--^encoding=<name>]
|
||
[--^repositorypaths | --^fullpaths | --^fp]
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
csetspec Returns all changes made in the specified changeset.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about changeset
|
||
specs.)
|
||
repspec Returns all changes made in the specified repository.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repository
|
||
specs.)
|
||
--^from Lists all the changes made in every changeset from the
|
||
changeset specification [csetspec_from] to the
|
||
changeset specification [csetspec].
|
||
The [csetspec_from] changeset is not included in the
|
||
output.
|
||
Ignored when a repository spec is provided.
|
||
--^allbranches Shows information about the changesets created in a
|
||
specified interval, for all the branches where those
|
||
changesets were created.
|
||
--^ancestors Shows information about the reachable changesets by
|
||
following the parent and merge links for the given
|
||
changeset ([csetspec]). If the from changeset
|
||
([csetspec_from]) is provided too, it will be used as
|
||
lower limit for all the paths. Remarks: The changeset
|
||
changes will not be shown when this option is used.
|
||
--^csformat Retrieves the changeset info in a specific format. See
|
||
Remarks for more info. This option cannot be combined
|
||
with '--^xml'.
|
||
--^itemformat Retrieves the item info in a specific format. See
|
||
Remarks for more info. This option cannot be combined
|
||
with '--^xml'.
|
||
--^xml Prints the output in XML format to the standard output.
|
||
It is possible to specify an output file. This option
|
||
cannot be combined with '--^csformat' and '--^itemformat'.
|
||
--^encoding Used with the '--^xml' option, specifies the encoding to
|
||
use in the XML output, i.e.: utf-8.
|
||
See the MSDN documentation at
|
||
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
|
||
to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
|
||
(at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
|
||
--^fullpaths, --^fp Force printing full workspace paths for files and
|
||
directories when possible.
|
||
--^repositorypaths Prints repository paths (server paths) instead of
|
||
workspace paths. (This option overrides the
|
||
'--^fullpaths' option).
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_LOG ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
- If neither 'csetspec' nor option is specified, the command shows
|
||
information about every changeset created within the last month in every
|
||
branch.
|
||
- If only the option '--^from' is included, the command shows the
|
||
information about every changeset from that specified changeset to the
|
||
last changeset in the branch where the changeset was created.
|
||
- If the option '--^allbranches' appears without an interval, the command
|
||
retrieves the same information as it would do if only 'csetspec' was
|
||
specified.
|
||
- If the '--^from' is used, the output contains information from the
|
||
'csetspec_from'+1 on.
|
||
- The repository used to show the changeset information is the one loaded
|
||
in the path where the command executes on.
|
||
|
||
This command accepts a format string for the items ('--^itemformat') and a
|
||
format string for the changesets ('--^csformat').
|
||
|
||
The output parameters of '--^csformat' are the following:
|
||
{^tab} Inserts a tab space.
|
||
{^newline} Inserts a new line.
|
||
{^changesetid} Changeset number.
|
||
{^branch} Branch where the changeset was created.
|
||
{^date} Date of the changeset.
|
||
{^owner} Owner of the changeset.
|
||
{^comment} Comment of the changeset.
|
||
{^items} Items involved in the changeset.
|
||
{^repository} Repository where the changeset exists.
|
||
{^repserver} Server name.
|
||
|
||
The output parameters of '--^itemformat' are the following:
|
||
{^tab} Inserts a tab space.
|
||
{^newline} Inserts a new line.
|
||
{^path} Item path.
|
||
{^branch} Branch where the changeset was created.
|
||
{^date} Date of the changeset.
|
||
{^owner} Owner of the changeset.
|
||
{^shortstatus} Prints the short format for the status. See below.
|
||
{^fullstatus} Prints the long format for the status. See below.
|
||
|
||
Short format and its corresponding long format:
|
||
'^A' ^Added
|
||
'^D' ^Deleted
|
||
'^M' ^Moved
|
||
'^C' ^Changed
|
||
|
||
These are valid output strings:
|
||
--^csformat="{^newline}Changeset {^changesetid} created on {^date};{^tab} changed items: {^items}."
|
||
--^itemformat="{^newline}The item {^path} was changed in the branch {^branch}."
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^log
|
||
(Shows information about every changeset created in the last month in every
|
||
branch.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^log ^cs:16
|
||
(Shows information about the changes done in the changeset 16 in the branch
|
||
where the changeset was created.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^log ^cs:16 --^csformat="{^newline}Changeset {^changesetid} created on \
|
||
{^date};{^tab} changed items: {^items}."
|
||
(Shows the information in the specified format.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^log --^from=^cs:20 ^cs:50
|
||
(Shows the information about every revision contained in every changeset
|
||
from the changeset 21 to the changeset 50.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^log --^from=^cs:20 ^cs:50 --^allbranches
|
||
(Shows the information about every revision contained in every changeset
|
||
from the changeset 21 to the changeset 50 in every branch of the
|
||
repository.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^log ^rep:myrep@localhost:8084
|
||
(Shows information about the changes done in the specified repository.
|
||
No workspace is required to run the command.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^log --^from=^cs:20@^rep:mainRep@localhost:8084
|
||
(Shows the information about every revision contained in every changeset
|
||
from the changeset 21. No workspace is required to run the command, because
|
||
the full changeset spec was specified.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_LS ==
|
||
Lists the contents of a tree.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_LS ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^ls | ^dir [<paths>[ ...]] [--^format=<str_format>] [--^symlink]
|
||
[--^selector[=<selector_format>]] [--^tree=<obj_spec>]
|
||
[-^R | -^r | --^recursive]
|
||
[--^xml[=<output_file>]] [--^encoding=<name>]
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
paths List of paths to show. Use a whitespace to separate
|
||
paths.
|
||
Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths containing
|
||
spaces.
|
||
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
|
||
Remarks for more info. This option cannot be combined
|
||
with '--^xml'.
|
||
--^symlink Applies the operation to the symlink and not to the
|
||
target.
|
||
--^selector Gets the content from the active workspace selector.
|
||
If selector_format is specified, then lists the
|
||
specified selector.
|
||
This is mostly deprecated since selectors are
|
||
no longer a central part of Unity VCS since 4.x.
|
||
--^tree Lists the tree in the specified changeset or branch.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
|
||
-^R Lists recursively.
|
||
--^xml Prints the output in XML format to the standard output.
|
||
It is possible to specify an output file. This option
|
||
cannot be combined with '--^format'.
|
||
--^encoding Used with the '--^xml' option, specifies the encoding to
|
||
use in the XML output, i.e.: utf-8.
|
||
See the MSDN documentation at
|
||
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
|
||
to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
|
||
(at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_LS ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
- Path can be typed with meta-characters.
|
||
- The list depends on the workspace selector.
|
||
- The output of the command can be formatted specifying a format string.
|
||
- If '--^tree' or '--^selector' options are specified, the given
|
||
path must be a server path (a.k.a.: 'cm path'): /dir/file.txt, not a
|
||
workspace path: C:\Users\myuser\mywk\dir\file.txt
|
||
- If no path is provided, the workspace path assumed is the current
|
||
directory. If '--^tree' or '--^selector' options are used, then
|
||
the root path ("/") is assumed.
|
||
|
||
The default format string is:
|
||
"{^size,10} {^date:dd/MM/yyyy} {^date:HH:mm}\
|
||
{^type,-6} {^location,-12} {^checkout,-5} {^name}\
|
||
{^symlinktarget}"
|
||
|
||
Output format parameters (--^format option):
|
||
This command accepts a format string to show the output.
|
||
The output parameters of this command are the following:
|
||
{^size}
|
||
{^formattedsize}
|
||
{^date}
|
||
{^type}
|
||
^dir directory,
|
||
^txt text file,
|
||
^File file.
|
||
{^location} Example: ^br:branch#cset
|
||
{^checkout}
|
||
{^name}
|
||
{^changeset}
|
||
{^path}
|
||
{^repspec}
|
||
{^owner}
|
||
{^revid}
|
||
{^parentrevid}
|
||
{^itemid}
|
||
{^brid}
|
||
{^repid}
|
||
{^server}
|
||
{^symlinktarget}
|
||
{^hash}
|
||
{^chmod}
|
||
{^wkpath} Path relative to workspace root
|
||
{^branch}
|
||
{^newlocation} cset@branch
|
||
{^guid} (Will take longer to resolve)
|
||
{^itemguid}
|
||
{^transformed} Show applied rule for transformed items. Check the
|
||
Administrator Guide to learn about Transformable workspaces:
|
||
https://www.plasticscm.com/download/help/adminguide
|
||
|
||
You can customize the '^ls' format setting the PLASTIC_LS_FORMAT environment
|
||
variable.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^ls
|
||
cm ^ls c:\workspace\src
|
||
|
||
cm ^ls --^format={^name}
|
||
(Only file names.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^ls --^symlink
|
||
(Displays information about the symlink instead of the target file or
|
||
directory.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^ls code --^selector
|
||
(Shows the content of the 'code' subdirectory from the current workspace
|
||
selector.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^ls /code --^selector="^rep 'myrep' ^path '/' ^branch '/^main'"
|
||
(Shows the content of the '/code' subdirectory on the specified selector.
|
||
Note that the path is specified in server format.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^ls /code --^tree=44@myrep@denver:7070
|
||
(Lists the '/code' subdirectory at changeset 44 at repo 'myrep' at server
|
||
'denver:7070'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^ls /code --^tree=^br:/main/scm13596@myrep@denver:7070
|
||
(Lists the '/code' subdirectory at the latest changeset in branch
|
||
'/main/scm13596' at repo 'myrep' at server 'denver:7070'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^ls /code --^tree=ae1390ed-7ce9-4ec3-a155-e5a61de0dc77@myrep@denver:7070
|
||
(Lists the '/code' subdirectory at changeset
|
||
ae1390ed-7ce9-4ec3-a155-e5a61de0dc77 at repo 'myrep' at server
|
||
'denver:7070'.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_TRIGGER_LIST ==
|
||
Lists the triggers of a given type on a server.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_TRIGGER_LIST ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^trigger | ^tr ^list | ^ls [<subtype-type>] [--^server=<repserverspec>]
|
||
[--^format=<str_format>]
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
subtype-type Trigger execution and trigger operation.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^showtriggertypes' to see a list of trigger
|
||
types.)
|
||
--^server Lists the triggers on the specified server.
|
||
If no server is specified, executes the command on the
|
||
one configured on the client.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about server
|
||
specs.)
|
||
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
|
||
Remarks for more info.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_TRIGGER_LIST ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
If the type is not specified, lists all the triggers on the server.
|
||
|
||
Output format parameters (--^format option):
|
||
This command accepts a format string to show the output.
|
||
The output parameters of this command are the following:
|
||
{0} Trigger position.
|
||
{1} Trigger name.
|
||
{2} Trigger path.
|
||
{3} Trigger owner.
|
||
{4} Trigger type.
|
||
{5} Trigger filter.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
cm ^trigger list after-mklabel
|
||
(Lists all triggers of type 'after-mklabel' on the server configured on the
|
||
client.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^tr ^ls ^before-mkbranch --^server=myserver:8084
|
||
(Lists all triggers of type 'before-mkbranch' on server 'myserver:8084'.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_MANIPULATESELECTOR ==
|
||
Changes the selector to a date.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_MANIPULATESELECTOR ==
|
||
This is an automation command, meant to be used to automate 'cm' only.
|
||
It is not as user friendly as it should be.
|
||
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^manipulateselector | ^ms [<wk_path> | <wk_spec>] --^atdate=<sel_date>
|
||
|
||
wk_path Path of the workspace.
|
||
wk_spec Workspace specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to
|
||
learn more about specs.)
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^atdate Returns a selector that will recreate the workspace as
|
||
it would have looked at the specified date.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_MANIPULATESELECTOR ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
If neither path nor workspace spec is specified, the command will take the
|
||
current directory as workspace path.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^manipulateselector c:\workspace --^atdate=yyyy-MM-ddTHH:mm:ss
|
||
cm ^manipulateselector --^atdate=yyyy-MM-ddTHH:mm:ss
|
||
cm ^manipulateselector > mySelector.txt --^atdate=yyyy-MM-ddTHH:mm:ss
|
||
cm ^manipulateselector ^wk:build_wk@BUILDER --^atdate=yyyy-MM-ddTHH:mm:ss
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_MERGE ==
|
||
Merges a branch with another branch.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_MERGE ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^merge <source_spec> [--^merge] [--^cherrypicking] [--^forced]
|
||
[--^mergetype=(^onlyone|^onlysrc|^onlydst|^try|^forced)]
|
||
[--^interval-origin=<csetspec> | --^ancestor=<csetspec>]
|
||
[--^keepsource | --^ks] [--^keepdestination | --^kd]
|
||
[--^automaticresolution=<conflict-types>[;...]]
|
||
[--^subtractive] [--^mount] [--^printcontributors]
|
||
[--^noprintoperations] [--^silent]
|
||
[(--^to=<brspec> | --^destination=<brspec>)[--^shelve]]
|
||
[--^no-dst-changes]
|
||
[-^c=<str_comment> | --^commentsfile=<comments_file>]
|
||
[--^resolveconflict --^conflict=<index>
|
||
--^resolutionoption=(^src|^dst|(^rename --^resolutioninfo=<strname>))
|
||
--^mergeresultfile=<path> --^solvedconflictsfile=<path>]
|
||
[--^nointeractiveresolution]
|
||
[--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
|
||
[--^xml] [--^encoding]
|
||
[--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
|
||
|
||
source_spec Specification of the source object to merge from:
|
||
- a branch specification: '[^br:/]br_name'
|
||
- a label specification: '^lb:lb_name'
|
||
- a changeset specification: '^cs:cs_number'
|
||
- a shelve specification: '^sh:shelve_number'
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^merge Performs the merge. Otherwise, prints the
|
||
conflicts found.
|
||
--^cherrypicking Merges the changes included on the source
|
||
changesets. This option is not used if the merge
|
||
source specification is a label.
|
||
--^forced Does not check if the source and destination are
|
||
already connected.
|
||
This option is only available for interval merge
|
||
and cherry picking.
|
||
--^mergetype Type of the merge. See Remarks for more info.
|
||
--^interval-origin Specifies which changeset is chosen as the
|
||
interval origin, so the merge will only take the
|
||
differences between the source changeset and the
|
||
specified interval origin.
|
||
--^ancestor This is an alias of '--^interval-origin'.
|
||
--^keepsource Accepts all changes from source contributor for
|
||
items with conflicts.
|
||
--^keepdestination Preserves changes from destination contributor
|
||
for items with conflicts.
|
||
--^automaticresolution Used to resolve directory conflicts. This option
|
||
lets you choose whether the source or the
|
||
destination contributor should be automatically
|
||
selected to resolve the conflict.
|
||
Use a semicolon to separate conflict types.
|
||
See Remarks for more info.
|
||
--^subtractive Deletes changes introduced by a merge. The
|
||
parameter passed to the command (source_spec) is
|
||
used to specify which is the source to delete
|
||
changes. It must be a changeset. In the case of a
|
||
changeset interval, the '--^interval-origin' must
|
||
be used to define the interval origin. To remove
|
||
a change, the system creates a new checked out
|
||
revision which will have the content of the
|
||
previous one except for the deleted changes.
|
||
--^mount The mount point for the given repository.
|
||
--^printcontributors Prints the contributors (base, source, and
|
||
destination).
|
||
--^noprintoperations Silently resolves merges without showing
|
||
information about the resolution.
|
||
--^silent No output is shown unless an error happens.
|
||
--^to | --^destination Performs a merge-to operation to the specified
|
||
branch (by entering a branch spec or brspec)
|
||
with full conflict resolution.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about
|
||
branch specs.)
|
||
A "merge-to" (or workspace-less merge) is a merge
|
||
done in the server side. While normal merges
|
||
happen on a workspace merging "from" a branch,
|
||
label or changeset, a merge-to happens entirely
|
||
on the server. While in normal merges the
|
||
"destination" is the workspace, in "merge-to" a
|
||
destination must be always specified (that's why
|
||
we call it "to").
|
||
Check the following link for more information
|
||
about the "merge to" feature:
|
||
https://www.plasticscm.com/download/help/mergeto
|
||
--^shelve Creates a shelve with the changes of the merge
|
||
result (plus merge traceability info) instead of
|
||
creating a new changeset. This option is not
|
||
available when the merge source is a shelve. This
|
||
option is only available for server-side-merge
|
||
(a.k.a. "merge-to"). Hence, the '--^to' and
|
||
'--^merge' options are required.
|
||
--^no-dst-changes Ensures that the destination contributor doesn't
|
||
have changes (the destination changeset is also
|
||
the common ancestor). When there are changes on
|
||
the destination, the merge is not allowed.
|
||
-^c Applies the specified comment to the changeset
|
||
created in the merge operation.
|
||
--^commentsfile Applies the comment in the specified file to the
|
||
changeset created in the merge operation.
|
||
--^resolveconflict (Mainly used by plugins. See Remarks for more info.)
|
||
Used to solve a directory conflict.
|
||
--^conflict Used with the '--^resolveconflict' flag, specifies
|
||
the index of the conflict to solve starting at 1.
|
||
--^resolutionoption Used with the '--^resolveconflict' flag, indicates
|
||
the type of the conflict resolution. Use one of
|
||
the following options: '^src', '^dst', '^rename'.
|
||
See Remarks for more info.
|
||
--^resolutioninfo Used with the '--^resolveconflict' flag, provides
|
||
the name to use when the '--^resolutionoption'
|
||
option is 'rename'.
|
||
--^mergeresultfile Used with the '--^resolveconflict' flag, outputs
|
||
into a file the information of the merge result
|
||
between different calls .The specified path will
|
||
be created during the first call and updated on
|
||
each next call.
|
||
--^solvedconflictsfile Used with the '--^resolveconflict' flag, outputs
|
||
into a file the information of the conflicts
|
||
solved between different calls. The specified
|
||
path will be created during the first call and
|
||
updated on each next call.
|
||
--^nointeractiveresolution (Mainly used by plugins. See Remarks for more info.)
|
||
Avoids prompting the user for manual conflict.
|
||
This way, a directory conflict won't be solved.
|
||
--^machinereadable (Mainly used by plugins. See Remarks for more info.)
|
||
Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
|
||
--^xml Prints the output in XML format to the standard output.
|
||
It is possible to specify an output file. This option
|
||
cannot be combined with '--^format' nor '--^resolveconflict'.
|
||
--^encoding Used with the '--^xml' option, specifies the encoding to
|
||
use in the XML output, i.e.: utf-8.
|
||
See the MSDN documentation at
|
||
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
|
||
to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
|
||
(at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
|
||
--^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies
|
||
how the lines should start. (Default: empty string.)
|
||
--^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies
|
||
how the lines should end. (Default: empty string.)
|
||
--^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies
|
||
how the fields should be separated. (Default:
|
||
whitespace.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_MERGE ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
This command is used to merge changes between two branches or between a
|
||
label and a branch. The destination of the merge must be always a branch.
|
||
The merge source is specified as an argument.
|
||
Destination is the current content of the workspace.
|
||
For example, to display the elements that will be merged from branch
|
||
task001 to the main branch, the selector must point to the main branch,
|
||
the workspace must be updated, and then:
|
||
cm ^merge ^br:/task001
|
||
|
||
To really perform the merge, '--^merge' option is added:
|
||
cm ^merge ^br:/task001 --^merge
|
||
|
||
To define the merge source, the following specs can be used:
|
||
|
||
- A branch specification (brspec):
|
||
[^br:/]br_name
|
||
Example: ^br:/main/task001
|
||
(Merges from the last changeset on this branch.)
|
||
|
||
- A label specification (lbspec):
|
||
^lb:lb_name
|
||
Example: ^lb:BL001
|
||
(Merges from the labeled changeset.)
|
||
|
||
- A changeset specification (csetspec):
|
||
^cs:cs_number
|
||
Example: ^cs:25
|
||
(Merges from the given changeset content.)
|
||
|
||
- A shelve specification (shspec):
|
||
^sh:shelve_number
|
||
Example: ^sh:2
|
||
(Merges from the given shelve content.)
|
||
|
||
To automatically resolve directory conflicts, use '--^automaticresolution'
|
||
option and specify the type of conflict followed by the contributor
|
||
(source or destination) that must be selected during the merge operation.
|
||
(Separate each "type of conflict"-"contributor" pair by a semicolon (;).)
|
||
For example:
|
||
cm ^merge ^cs:2634 --^merge --^automaticresolution=^eviltwin-src;^changedelete-src
|
||
(The merge operation from changeset 2634 resolves the "^eviltwin" and
|
||
"^changedelete" conflicts by keeping the source ("-^src") contributor in
|
||
both cases.)
|
||
- A "-^src" suffix after a conflict type tells the merge command to keep the
|
||
source contributor changes.
|
||
- A "-^dst" suffix will keep the destination contributor changes.
|
||
This is the list of conflict types the merge command supports:
|
||
"^movedeviltwin", "^eviltwin", "^changedelete", "^deletechange", "^movedelete",
|
||
"^deletemove", "^loadedtwice", "^addmove", "^moveadd", "^divergentmove",
|
||
"^cyclemove", "^all".
|
||
The "^all" value overrides the other options. In the following example,
|
||
"^eviltwin-dst" will be ignored:
|
||
cm ^merge ^br:/main/task062 --^merge --^automaticresolution=^all-src;^eviltwin-dst
|
||
Check the following link to learn more about merge conflicts:
|
||
https://www.plasticscm.com/download/help/directorymerges
|
||
|
||
These are the options for '--^mergetype':
|
||
^onlyone Automatic merge if only one contributor modified the
|
||
item.
|
||
^onlysrc Automatic merge if only source contributor modified the
|
||
item.
|
||
^onlydst Automatic merge if only destination contributor modified
|
||
the item.
|
||
^try Automatic merge if only one contributor has modified the
|
||
conflictive piece of code (each conflict).
|
||
^forced Always try to solve all non-automatic conflicts.
|
||
|
||
These are the options that are mainly used by plugins and integrations:
|
||
- '--^resolveconflict' to solve a directory conflict. You also have to
|
||
use the following options:
|
||
- '--^conflict' is the index of the conflict that you want to
|
||
solve, starting at 1.
|
||
- '--^resolutionoption' indicates the conflict resolution to
|
||
use. This can be:
|
||
- '^src' to keep the source change and discard the
|
||
destination change
|
||
- '^dst' to keep the destination change and discard the
|
||
source change
|
||
- '^rename' (only if the conflict type supports this
|
||
resolution), to rename the destination to the given name
|
||
provided with the '--^resolutioninfo' option.
|
||
- '--^resolutioninfo' to provide the name to use on a
|
||
'^rename' resolution
|
||
- '--^mergeresultfile' and '--^solvedconflictsfile', both used to
|
||
store the merge info between different calls.
|
||
- '--^nointeractiveresolution' indicates the merge to not ask the user for
|
||
manual conflict resolution.
|
||
- '--^machinereadable' and '--^startlineseparator', '--^endlineseparator',
|
||
'--^fieldseparator' options to print the output on a machine-readable
|
||
way (easier-to-parse).
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^merge --^machinereadable --^startlineseparator=start@_@line \
|
||
--^endlineseparator=new@_@line --^fieldseparator=def#_#sep \
|
||
--^mergeresultfile=C:\Users\Borja\AppData\Local\Temp\2tmp4D6C.tmp \
|
||
--^solvedconflictsfile=C:\Users\Borja\AppData\Local\Temp\2tmp4D6D.tmp \
|
||
--^resolveconflict --^conflict=1 --^resolutionoption=rename \
|
||
--^resolutioninfo=bin_dst ^br:/main/task --^merge
|
||
|
||
Set the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable to specify an editor for
|
||
entering comments. If the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable is set, and
|
||
the comment is empty, the editor will be automatically launched to allow
|
||
you to specify the comment.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^merge ^br:/task001
|
||
(Does not merge, just prints items to be merged.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^merge ^br:/task001 --^merge
|
||
(Does merge from branch 'task001'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^merge ^cs:5 --^merge --^cherrypicking --^interval-origin=^cs:2
|
||
(Cherry pick from the changeset interval (2,5].)
|
||
|
||
cm ^merge ^cs:8 --^merge --^subtractive --^keepdestination
|
||
(Subtractive merge from changeset 8, keeping destination changes for those
|
||
elements with conflicts.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^merge ^br:/main/task001 --^to=^br:/main --^merge -^c="Integrated new UI"
|
||
(Does server-side merge, a.k.a. merge-to, from branch 'task001' to branch
|
||
'main' and sets a comment.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^merge ^br:/main/task001 --^to=^br:/main --^merge --^shelve
|
||
(Does server-side merge from branch 'task001' to branch 'main' and leaves
|
||
the result on a shelve.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^merge ^sh:2 --^to=^br:/main --^merge --^no-dst-changes
|
||
(Applies the shelve 2 into 'main' only if it was created from the current
|
||
'main' head')
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_ATTRIBUTE_CREATE ==
|
||
Creates a new attribute.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_ATTRIBUTE_CREATE ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^attribute | ^att ^create | ^mk <att_name>
|
||
|
||
att_name Attribute name
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_ATTRIBUTE_CREATE ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
Set the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable to specify an editor for
|
||
entering comments. If the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable is set, and
|
||
the comment is empty, the editor will be automatically launched to allow
|
||
you to specify the comment.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^attribute ^create status
|
||
(Creates the attribute 'status'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^att ^mk integrated
|
||
(Creates the attribute 'integrated'.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_BRANCH ==
|
||
Allows the user to manage branches.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_BRANCH ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^branch | ^br <command> [options]
|
||
|
||
Commands:
|
||
|
||
^create | ^mk
|
||
^delete | ^rm
|
||
^rename
|
||
^history
|
||
^showmain
|
||
^showmerges
|
||
|
||
To get more information about each command run:
|
||
cm ^branch <command> --^usage
|
||
cm ^branch <command> --^help
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_BRANCH ==
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^branch /main/scm21345
|
||
cm ^branch ^create /main/scm21345
|
||
cm ^branch ^delete /main/scm21345
|
||
cm ^branch ^rename /main/scm21345 scm21346
|
||
cm ^branch ^history /main/scm21345
|
||
cm ^branch ^showmain
|
||
cm ^branch ^showmerges file.txt
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_BRANCH_CREATE ==
|
||
Creates a new branch.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_BRANCH_CREATE ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^branch | ^br [^create | ^mk] <brspec>
|
||
[--^changeset=<csetspec> | --^label=<lbspec>]
|
||
[-^c=<str_comment> | -^commentsfile=<comments_file>]
|
||
|
||
brspec The new branch name or spec.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about branch specs.)
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^changeset Changeset used as starting point for the new branch.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about cset specs.)
|
||
--^label Label used as starting point for the new branch.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about label specs.)
|
||
-^c Fills in the comment field of the new branch with the
|
||
specified text.
|
||
-^commentsfile Fills in the comment field of the new branch with the
|
||
contents of the specified file.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_BRANCH_CREATE ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
To create a top-level branch, specify the name without any hierarchy.
|
||
For example:
|
||
|
||
cm ^br /dev
|
||
|
||
If no optional parameter '--^changeset' is specified, the base of the new
|
||
branch will be the last changeset on the parent branch. If the new branch
|
||
is a top-level branch, the base changeset used will be cset 0.
|
||
|
||
You can specify a comment using either the '-^c' or the '-^m' switches:
|
||
|
||
cm ^branch /main/task001 -^c="This is the comment"
|
||
cm ^branch /main/task001 -^m "This is the comment"
|
||
|
||
Set the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable to specify an editor for
|
||
entering comments. If the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable is set, and
|
||
the comment is empty, the editor will be automatically launched to allow
|
||
you to specify the comment.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^branch task001
|
||
cm ^branch ^create task001
|
||
cm ^branch ^mk task001
|
||
cm ^br ^mk task001
|
||
(All of the examples above, create a top-level 'task001' branch in the
|
||
repository of the current workspace.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^branch ^br:/task001/task002@
|
||
(Creates 'task002' branch as child of 'task001'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^br /main/task001@myrep@myserver:8084 -^c="my comment"
|
||
(Creates 'task001' branch as child of 'main' in repository
|
||
'myrep@myserver:8084' with comment 'my comment'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^branch ^br:/main/task001 --^changeset=2837 -^commentsfile=commenttask001.txt
|
||
(Creates the 'task001' branch as child of 'main' with base 'changeset=2837',
|
||
and applies the comment in 'commenttask001.txt' file.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_BRANCH_DELETE ==
|
||
Deletes one or more branches.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_BRANCH_DELETE ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^branch | ^br ^delete | ^rm <brspec>[ ...]
|
||
|
||
brspec Branch to delete. Use a whitespace to separate branches.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about branch
|
||
specs.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_BRANCH_DELETE ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
This command deletes one or more branches.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^branch ^delete /main/task001
|
||
(Deletes the branch with name 'task001' that is a child of 'main' in the
|
||
repository of the current workspace.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^br ^rm main/task002 /main/task012@reptest@myserver:8084
|
||
(Deletes branches '/main/task002' in the repository of the current workspace
|
||
and '/main/task012' in the repository 'reptest@myserver:8084'.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_BRANCH_RENAME ==
|
||
Renames a branch.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_BRANCH_RENAME ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^branch | ^br ^rename <brspec> <new_name>
|
||
|
||
brspec Branch to rename.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about branch specs.)
|
||
new_name New name for the branch.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_BRANCH_RENAME ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
This command renames a branch.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^branch ^rename /main/task0 task1
|
||
(Renames branch '/main/task0' to '/main/task1'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^br ^rename ^br:/main@reptest@server2:8084 secondary
|
||
(Renames the 'main' branch of repository 'reptest' to 'secondary'.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_BRANCH_HISTORY ==
|
||
Shows the history of a branch.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_BRANCH_HISTORY ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^branch | ^br ^history <brspec> [--^dateformat=<date_format>]
|
||
[--^machinereadable]
|
||
|
||
brspec The branch specification to obtain the history.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about branch specs.)
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^dateformat Format used to output dates.
|
||
--^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_BRANCH_HISTORY ==
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^branch ^history ^br:/main/scm001@myrepository@myserver:8084
|
||
(Displays the history of '/main/scm001' branch of 'myrepository' repository
|
||
on 'myserver' server.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^br ^history main --^dateformat="yyyy, dd MMMM" --^machinereadable
|
||
(Displays the history of the 'main' branch of the current repository,
|
||
with a given date format, and in an easy-to-parse format.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_BRANCH_SHOWMAIN ==
|
||
Shows the main branch of a repository.
|
||
This is an automation command, meant to be used to automate 'cm' only.
|
||
Most likely, the main branch of your repository is '/main'.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_BRANCH_SHOWMAIN ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^branch | ^br ^showmain [<repspec>] [--^encoding=<name>]
|
||
[--^format=<format_str>] [--^dateformat=<date_format>]
|
||
|
||
repspec The repository specification where to show the main
|
||
branch. If no repspec is specified, the command will show
|
||
the main branch for the repository of the current
|
||
workspace.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about rep specs.)
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^encoding Specifies the encoding to use in the output,
|
||
i.e.: utf-8.
|
||
See the MSDN documentation at
|
||
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
|
||
to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
|
||
(at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
|
||
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
|
||
Remarks for more info.
|
||
--^dateformat Format used to output dates.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_BRANCH_SHOWMAIN ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
This command shows the main branch of a repository.
|
||
|
||
Output format parameters (--^format option):
|
||
This command accepts a format string to show the output.
|
||
The output parameters of this command are the following:
|
||
{^id} Branch id.
|
||
{^comment} Comment.
|
||
{^date} Date.
|
||
{^name} Name.
|
||
{^owner} Owner.
|
||
{^parent} Parent branch name.
|
||
{^repository} Repository.
|
||
{^repname} Repository name.
|
||
{^repserver} Server.
|
||
{^changeset} Head changeset of the branch.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^branch ^showmain
|
||
(Displays the main branch for the repository of the current workspace.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^branch ^showmain repo@server:8084
|
||
(Displays the main branch for the repository 'repo' in server
|
||
'server:8084'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^br ^showmain --^dateformat="yyyy, dd MMMM" --^encoding=utf-8
|
||
(Displays the main branch of the repository with a given date format,
|
||
and the output is in utf-8.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^br ^showmain --^format="{^id} - {^name}"
|
||
(Displays the main branch of the repository, printing only its id and name.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_BRANCH_SHOWMERGES ==
|
||
Shows branches pending to be merged.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_BRANCH_SHOWMERGES ==
|
||
This is an automation command, meant to be used to automate 'cm' only.
|
||
It is not as user friendly as it should be.
|
||
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^branch | ^br ^showmerges <item_path>[ ...]
|
||
[--^format=<format_str>]
|
||
[--^dateformat=<date_format>]
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
|
||
Remarks for more info.
|
||
--^dateformat Format used to output dates.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_BRANCH_SHOWMERGES ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
Output format parameters (--^format option):
|
||
This command accepts a format string to show the output.
|
||
The output parameters of this command are the following:
|
||
{^id} Branch id.
|
||
{^comment} Comment.
|
||
{^date} Date.
|
||
{^name} Name.
|
||
{^owner} Owner.
|
||
{^parent} Parent branch name.
|
||
{^parentid} Parent branch id.
|
||
{^repid} Repository id.
|
||
{^repository} Repository.
|
||
{^repname} Repository name.
|
||
{^repserver} Repository server.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^branch ^showmerges file.txt
|
||
(Displays branches involved in the pending merge of 'file.txt'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^branch ^showmerges file.txt --^format="{^date} {^name}" --^dateformat="ddMMyy"
|
||
(Displays branches involved in the merge, printing only the date and the
|
||
name, with a given date format.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_REPOSITORY ==
|
||
Allows the user to manage repositories.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_REPOSITORY ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^repository | ^repo <command> [options]
|
||
|
||
Commands:
|
||
|
||
^create | ^mk
|
||
^delete | ^rm
|
||
^list | ^ls
|
||
^rename
|
||
^add
|
||
|
||
To get more information about each command run:
|
||
cm ^repository <command> --^usage
|
||
cm ^repository <command> --^help
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_REPOSITORY ==
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^repository
|
||
cm ^repository ^list
|
||
cm ^repository newrepo
|
||
cm ^repository ^create newrepo
|
||
cm ^repository ^rename oldname newname
|
||
cm ^repository ^add C:\repo\
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_REPOSITORY_CREATE ==
|
||
Creates a repository on a server.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_REPOSITORY_CREATE ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^repository | ^repo <rep_name>
|
||
cm ^repository | ^repo <repserverspec> <rep_name>[ ...]
|
||
cm ^repository | ^repo [^create | ^mk] <rep_name>
|
||
|
||
repserverspec Repository server specification.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about rep server
|
||
specs.)
|
||
rep_name Name or names of the new repository or repositories.
|
||
Use a whitespace to separate repository names.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_REPOSITORY_CREATE ==
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^repository MyRep
|
||
cm ^repo 192.168.1.140:8087 Rep01 Rep01/ModuleA Rep01/ModuleB
|
||
cm ^repo ^create Rep01
|
||
cm ^repo ^mk list
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_REPOSITORY_DELETE ==
|
||
Deletes a repository from a server.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_REPOSITORY_DELETE ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^repository | ^repo ^delete | ^rm <repspec>
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
repspec Repository specification.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about rep specs.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_REPOSITORY_DELETE ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
Deletes a repository from the repository server.
|
||
The data is not removed from the database backend, but unplugged
|
||
so that it will not be accessible anymore.
|
||
(Data can be reconnected afterwards, see 'cm ^repository ^add'.)
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^repository ^delete myrepository@^repserver:myserver:8084
|
||
cm ^repository ^rm myrepository@myserver:8084
|
||
cm ^repo ^rm myrepository
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_REPOSITORY_LIST ==
|
||
Lists the repositories on a server.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_REPOSITORY_LIST ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^repository | ^repo [^list | ^ls] [<repserverspec>] [--^format=<str_format>]
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
repserverspec Repository server specification.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about rep server
|
||
specs.)
|
||
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
|
||
Remarks for more info.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_REPOSITORY_LIST ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
Output format parameters (--^format option):
|
||
This command accepts a format string to show the output.
|
||
The output parameters of this command are the following:
|
||
{^repid} | {0} Repository identifier.
|
||
{^repname} | {1} Repository name.
|
||
{^repserver} | {2} Server name.
|
||
{^repowner} | {3} Repository owner.
|
||
{^repguid} | {4} Unique identifier of the repository.
|
||
{^tab} Inserts a tab space.
|
||
{^newline} Inserts a new line.
|
||
|
||
If the format parameter value is '^TABLE', the output will be printed
|
||
using a table format with the {^repid}, {^repname} and {^repserver} fields.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^repository
|
||
(Lists all repositories.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^repository ^list localhost:8084 --^format="{1, -20} {3}"
|
||
(Writes the repository name in 20 spaces, aligned to left, then a blank,
|
||
and then the repository owner.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^repository ^ls localhost:8084 --^format="{^repname, -20} {^repowner}"
|
||
(Writes the same as the previous example.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^repo ^ls localhost:8084 --^format=^TABLE
|
||
(Writes the list of repositories using a table format with the following
|
||
fields: repository id, repository name, and repository server name.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_REPOSITORY_RENAME ==
|
||
Renames a repository.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_REPOSITORY_RENAME ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^repository | ^repo ^rename [<repspec>] <new_name>
|
||
|
||
repspec Repository to be renamed.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repository
|
||
specifications.)
|
||
new_name New name for the repository.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_REPOSITORY_RENAME ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
This command renames a repository.
|
||
If no repspec is specified, current repository will be assumed.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^repository ^rename development
|
||
(The current repository will be renamed to 'development'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^repo ^rename ^rep:default@SERVER:8084 development
|
||
(The 'default' repository on 'SERVER' will be renamed to 'development'.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_REPOSITORY_ADD ==
|
||
Connects an existing repository by adding its database.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_REPOSITORY_ADD ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^repository | ^repo ^add <db_file> <rep_name> <repserverspec>
|
||
|
||
db_file The name of the database file on the database backend.
|
||
rep_name The name of the repository.
|
||
repserverspec The repository server specification.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repository
|
||
server specifications.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_REPOSITORY_ADD ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
Reconnects an existing repository database to the server. This command is
|
||
useful to move a repository from one server to another, or to restore an
|
||
archived repository after using the 'cm ^repository ^delete' command.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^repository ^add rep_27 myrepository myserver:8084
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_TRIGGER_CREATE ==
|
||
Creates a new trigger on a server.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_TRIGGER_CREATE ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^trigger | ^tr ^create | ^mk <subtype-type> <new_name> <script_path>
|
||
[--^position=<new_position>]
|
||
[--^filter=<str_filter>]
|
||
[--^server=<repserverspec>]
|
||
|
||
subtype-type Trigger execution and trigger operation.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^showtriggertypes' to see a list of trigger
|
||
types.)
|
||
new_name Name of the new trigger.
|
||
script_path Disk path on the server where the script to execute is
|
||
located. If the command line starts with "^webtrigger ",
|
||
the trigger will be considered as a web trigger. See
|
||
Remarks for more information.
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^position New position of the specified trigger.
|
||
This position must not be in use by another trigger of
|
||
the same type.
|
||
--^filter Checks only items that matches the specified filter.
|
||
--^server Creates the trigger on the specified server.
|
||
If no server is specified, executes the command on the
|
||
one configured on the client.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repository
|
||
server specifications.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_TRIGGER_CREATE ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
Web triggers: A web trigger is created by typing "^webtrigger <target-uri>"
|
||
as the trigger command. In this case, the trigger will execute a POST query
|
||
against the specified URI -where the request body contains a JSON
|
||
dictionary with the trigger environment variables- and a fixed INPUT key
|
||
pointing to an array of strings.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^trigger ^create ^after-setselector "BackupMgr" "/path/to/script" --^position=4
|
||
|
||
cm ^tr ^mk ^before-mklabel new "/path/to/script" --^server=myserver:8084
|
||
|
||
cm ^tr ^mk ^after-mklabel Log "/path/to/script" --^filter="^rep:myRep,LB*"
|
||
(This trigger will be executed only if the label name starts with 'LB'
|
||
and it is being created in a repository called 'myRep'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^tr ^mk ^after-checkin NotifyTeam "^webtrigger http://myserver.org/api"
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_MOVE ==
|
||
Moves or renames a file or directory.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_MOVE ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^move | ^mv <src_path> <dst_path> [--^format=<str_format>]
|
||
[--^errorformat=<str_format>]
|
||
|
||
src_path Source item path.
|
||
dst_path Destination item path.
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
|
||
Remarks for more info.
|
||
--^errorformat Retrieves the error message in a specific format. See
|
||
Remarks for more info.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_MOVE ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
This command moves or renames an item in the repository.
|
||
Changes are done in the local filesystem too.
|
||
|
||
If the source path is a file, the destination path can be a file or a
|
||
directory. In the first case, the file is renamed; otherwise, the item
|
||
is moved.
|
||
If source path is a directory, the destination path must be a directory.
|
||
|
||
The item to move or rename must exist.
|
||
|
||
Format:
|
||
{0} Source path (both for '--^format' and '--^errorformat')
|
||
{1} Destination path (both for '--^format' and '--^errorformat')
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^move file.txt file.old
|
||
(Renames the item.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^mv .\file.old .\oldFiles
|
||
(Moves 'file.old' to 'oldFiles'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^move .\src .\src2
|
||
(Renames a directory.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_LABEL ==
|
||
Allows the user to manage labels.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_LABEL ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^label | ^lb <command> [options]
|
||
|
||
Commands:
|
||
|
||
^create | ^mk
|
||
^delete | ^rm
|
||
^rename
|
||
|
||
To get more information about each command run:
|
||
cm ^label <command> --^usage
|
||
cm ^label <command> --^help
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_LABEL ==
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^label myNewLabel ^cs:42
|
||
('^create' command is optional.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^label ^rename myNewLabel newLabelName
|
||
cm ^label ^delete newLabelName
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_LABEL_CREATE ==
|
||
Applies a label to a changeset and creates the label if required.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_LABEL_CREATE ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^label [^create] <lbspec> [<csetspec> | <wk_path>]
|
||
[--^allxlinkedrepositories]
|
||
[-^c=<str_comment> | -^commentsfile=<comments_file>]
|
||
|
||
lbspec The new label name.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about label
|
||
specs.)
|
||
csetspec Name or full specification of the changeset to label.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about changeset
|
||
specs.)
|
||
wk_path Path of the workspace to label. (The changeset that the
|
||
workspace is pointing will be labeled.)
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^allxlinkedrepositories Creates the new label in all Xlinked repositories.
|
||
-^c Applies the specified comment to the new label.
|
||
-^commentsfile Applies the comment in the specified file to the
|
||
new label.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_LABEL_CREATE ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
Set the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable to specify an editor for
|
||
entering comments. If the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable is set, and
|
||
the comment is empty, the editor will be automatically launched to allow
|
||
you to specify the comment.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^label ^create ^lb:BL001 ^cs:1203 -^commentsfile=commentlb001.txt
|
||
(Creates label 'BL001' attached to changeset 1203, and applies the comment
|
||
in the 'commentlb001.txt' file.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^label BL002 ^cs:1203 -^c="first release"
|
||
(Creates label 'BL002', with a comment, and attached to changeset 1203.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_LABEL_DELETE ==
|
||
Deletes one or more labels.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_LABEL_DELETE ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^label ^delete <lbspec>[ ...]
|
||
|
||
lbspec Label to delete. Use a whitespace to separate labels.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about label
|
||
specs.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_LABEL_DELETE ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
This command deletes one or more labels.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^label ^delete ^lb:BL001
|
||
(Deletes the label 'BL001'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^label ^delete ^lb:BL001 ^lb:BL002@reptest@server2:8084
|
||
(Deletes the labels 'BL001' and 'BL002'.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_LABEL_RENAME ==
|
||
Renames a label.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_LABEL_RENAME ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^label ^rename <lbspec> <new_name>
|
||
|
||
lbspec Label to rename.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about label specs.)
|
||
new_name New name for the label.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_LABEL_RENAME ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
This command renames a label.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^label ^rename ^lb:BL001 BL002
|
||
(Renames the label 'BL001' to 'BL002'.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_OBLITERATE ==
|
||
DEPRECATED
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_OBLITERATE ==
|
||
DEPRECATED.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_OBLITERATE ==
|
||
DEPRECATED.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_OBJECTSPEC ==
|
||
Describes how to write object specs.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_OBJECTSPEC ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
cm ^objectspec
|
||
To get all the information about how to build object specs.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_OBJECTSPEC ==
|
||
Several Unity VCS commands expect 'object specs' as input to refer to a
|
||
given object (typically a branch, changeset, repository, etc).
|
||
|
||
This documentation describes the different "specs" available and how to
|
||
build them.
|
||
|
||
Each spec type begins with a unique tag, for example "^rep:" or "^cs:". The tag
|
||
must be specified for commands that take a general object spec, for example
|
||
"cm ^setowner object_spec", but can often be omitted for commands that take only
|
||
a single type of spec, for example, "cm ^getfile revision_spec".
|
||
|
||
-- Repository server spec (repserverspec) --
|
||
^repserver:name:port
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
cm ^repo ^list ^repserver:skull:8084
|
||
cm ^repo ^list skull:8084
|
||
|
||
Side note:
|
||
We call it 'repository server spec', instead of just 'server spec' for
|
||
historical reasons. Long ago, we had separate workspace and repository
|
||
servers, and the naming survived.
|
||
|
||
-- Repository spec (repspec) --
|
||
^rep:rep_name@[repserverspec]
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
cm ^showowner ^rep:codice@localhost:6060
|
||
(Here the "^rep:" is required because ^showowner admits not only repos
|
||
but also other types of objects. So it needs the user to indicate the
|
||
object type.)
|
||
|
||
-- Branch spec (brspec) --
|
||
^br:[/]br_name[@repspec]
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
cm ^switch ^br:/main@^rep:plastic@^repserver:skull:9095
|
||
(In this case "^br:", "^rep" and "^repserver" are not needed, so the
|
||
command admits a much shorter form:
|
||
"cm ^switch main@plastic@skull:9095".)
|
||
|
||
cm ^find ^revisions "^where ^branch='^br:/main/task001'"
|
||
|
||
Remark:
|
||
The initial '/' on the branch is not mandatory. We used to specify all
|
||
our branches as /main, /main/task001, and so on. But now, we prefer the
|
||
shorter form main, main/task001 which makes commands more compact.
|
||
|
||
-- Changeset spec (csetspec) --
|
||
^cs:cs_number|cs_guid[@repspec]
|
||
|
||
The number or GUID of the changeset can be specified.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
cm ^ls /code --^tree=ae1390ed-7ce9-4ec3-a155-e5a61de0dc77@code@skull:7070
|
||
|
||
-- Label spec (labelspec) --
|
||
^lb:lb_name[@repspec]
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
cm ^switch ^lb:RELEASE2.0
|
||
cm ^switch ^lb:RELEASE1.4@myrep@MYSERVER:8084
|
||
|
||
-- Revision spec --
|
||
There are different types of rev specs:
|
||
|
||
^rev:item_path[#(brspec|csetspec|labelspec)]
|
||
|
||
^rev:^serverpath:item_path#(brspec|cset_spec|lb_spec)
|
||
|
||
^rev:^revid:rev_id[@rep_spec]
|
||
|
||
^rev:^itemid:item_id#(br_spec|cset_spec|lb_spec)
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
cm ^diff ^rev:readme.txt#^cs:19 ^rev:readme.txt#^cs:20
|
||
|
||
cm ^diff ^serverpath:/doc/readme.txt#^cs:19@myrepo \
|
||
^serverpath:/doc/readme.txt#^br:/main@myrepo@localhost:8084
|
||
|
||
cm ^cat ^revid:1230@^rep:myrep@^repserver:myserver:8084
|
||
|
||
-- Item spec --
|
||
^item:path
|
||
Rarely used.
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^revision "^where ^item='^item:.'"
|
||
|
||
-- Attribute spec --
|
||
^att:att_name[@repspec]
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^attribute ^set ^att:merged@code@doe:8084 ^cs:25@code@doe:8084 done
|
||
|
||
-- Shelve spec --
|
||
^sh:sh_number[@repspec]
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^diff ^sh:2 ^sh:4
|
||
|
||
-- Workspace specs --
|
||
^wk:name@clientmachine
|
||
|
||
Rarely used, since they only apply to workspace related commands. Useful to
|
||
specify the workspace by name and machine instead of path.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
cm ^showselector ^wk:codebase@modok
|
||
|
||
Side note:
|
||
These specs come from the old days of Plastic SCM 2.x where 'workspace
|
||
servers' existed as a way to store workspace metadata in a centralized
|
||
way. Were deprecated due to performance issues.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL ==
|
||
Runs commands in a partial workspace.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial <command> [options]
|
||
|
||
Commands:
|
||
|
||
^configure
|
||
^add
|
||
^undo
|
||
^co | ^checkout
|
||
^unco | ^undocheckout
|
||
^ci | ^checkin
|
||
^mv | ^move
|
||
^rm | ^remove
|
||
^stb | ^switch
|
||
^upd | ^update
|
||
^shelve | ^shelveset
|
||
|
||
To get more information about each command run:
|
||
cm ^partial <command> --^usage
|
||
cm ^partial <command> --^help
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_PARTIAL ==
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^configure +/background-blue.png
|
||
cm ^partial ^update landscape-1024.png
|
||
cm ^partial ^checkin eyes-green.png eyes-black.png
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_ADD ==
|
||
Adds an item to version control.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_ADD ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^add [-^R | -^r | --^recursive] [--^silent] [--^parents]
|
||
[--^ignorefailed] [--^skipcontentcheck] <item_path>[ ...]
|
||
[--^format=<str-format>] [--^errorformat=<str-format>]
|
||
|
||
item_path Items to add. Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths
|
||
containing spaces. Use a whitespace to separate paths.
|
||
Use * to add all the contents of the current directory.
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
-^R Adds items recursively.
|
||
--^silent Does not show any output.
|
||
--^parents Includes the parent directories of the items specified
|
||
in the operation.
|
||
--^ignorefailed If an item cannot be added, the add operation will
|
||
continue without it. Note: If a directory cannot be
|
||
added, its content is not added.
|
||
--^skipcontentcheck When the extension is not enough to set the file as
|
||
text or binary, it will be set as binary by default
|
||
instead of checking the content to detect the type.
|
||
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. Check
|
||
the examples for more information.
|
||
--^errorformat Retrieves the error message (if any) in a specific
|
||
format. Check the examples for more information.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_ADD ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
Requirements to add items:
|
||
- The parent directory of the item to add must be previously added.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^add pic1.png pic2.png
|
||
(Adds 'pic1.png' and 'pic2.png' items.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^add c:\workspace\picture.png
|
||
(Adds 'picture.png' item in path 'c:\workspace'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^add -^R c:\workspace\src
|
||
(Recursively adds 'src'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^add --^parents samples\design01.png
|
||
(Adds 'design01.png' file and 'samples' parent folder.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^add -^R *
|
||
(Recursively adds all the contents of the current directory.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^add -^R * --^format="ADD {0}" --^errorformat="ERR {0}"
|
||
(Recursively adds all the contents of the current directory, printing
|
||
'^ADD <item>' for successfully added files, and '^ERR <item>' for items that
|
||
could not be added.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_CHECKIN ==
|
||
Stores changes in the repository.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_CHECKIN ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^checkin | ^ci [<item_path>[ ...]]
|
||
[-^c=<str_comment> | -^commentsfile=<comments_file>]
|
||
[--^all | -^a] [--^applychanged] [--^keeplock]
|
||
[--^symlink] [--^ignorefailed]
|
||
[--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
|
||
[--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
item_path Items to checkin. Use double quotes (" ") to specify
|
||
paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to separate
|
||
paths.
|
||
Use . to apply checkin to current directory.
|
||
-^c Specifies a comment to the changeset created in the
|
||
checkin operation.
|
||
-^commentsfile Applies the comment from the specified file to the
|
||
changeset created in the checkin operation.
|
||
--^all | -^a Includes also the items changed, moved, and deleted
|
||
locally on the specified paths.
|
||
--^applychanged Applies the checkin operation to the changed items
|
||
detected in the workspace along with the checked out
|
||
items.
|
||
--^private Private items detected in the workspace are also
|
||
included.
|
||
--^keeplock Keeps the lock of the locked items after the checkin
|
||
operation.
|
||
--^symlink Applies the checkin operation to the symlink and not to
|
||
the target.
|
||
--^ignorefailed Any changes that cannot be applied (because the lock
|
||
- a.k.a. exclusive checkout - cannot be adquired or
|
||
because local changes are in conflict with the server
|
||
changes) are discarded and the checkin operation
|
||
continues without them.
|
||
--^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
|
||
--^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
|
||
the lines should start.
|
||
--^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
|
||
the lines should end.
|
||
--^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
|
||
the fields should be separated.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_CHECKIN ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
- If <item_path> is not specified, the checkin will involve all the
|
||
pending changes in the workspace.
|
||
- The checkin operation always applies recursively from the given path.
|
||
- To checkin an item:
|
||
- The item must be under source code control.
|
||
- The item must be checked out.
|
||
- If the item is changed but not checked out, the '--^applychanged' flag
|
||
is not necessary unless <item_path> is a directory or it contains
|
||
wildcards ('*').
|
||
|
||
Revision content should be different from previous revision in order to be
|
||
checked in.
|
||
|
||
Set the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable to specify an editor for
|
||
entering comments. If the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable is set, and
|
||
the comment is empty, the editor will be automatically launched to allow
|
||
you to specify the comment.
|
||
|
||
Reading input from stdin:
|
||
|
||
The '^partial ^checkin' command can read paths from stdin. To do this, pass a
|
||
single dash "-".
|
||
Example: cm ^partial ^checkin -
|
||
|
||
Paths will be read until an empty line is entered.
|
||
This allows you to use pipe to specify which files to checkin.
|
||
Example:
|
||
dir /S /B *.c | cm ^partial ^checkin --^all -
|
||
(In Windows, checkins all .c files in the workspace.)
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^checkin figure.png landscape.png
|
||
(Applies the checkin to 'figure.png' and 'landscape.png' checked-out files.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^checkin . -^commentsfile=mycomment.txt
|
||
(Applies checkin to current directory and sets the comment from the
|
||
'mycomment.txt' file.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^ci background.png -^c="my comment" --^keeplock
|
||
(Applies the checkin to 'background.png', includes a comment, and keeps the
|
||
lock.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^checkin --^applychanged
|
||
(Applies the checkin to all pending changes in the workspace.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^checkin link --^symlink
|
||
(Applies the checkin to the symlink file and not to the target.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^checkin . --^ignorefailed
|
||
(Applies checkin to current directory, ignoring the changes that cannot be
|
||
applied.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_CHECKOUT ==
|
||
Marks files as ready to modify.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_CHECKOUT ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^checkout | ^co [<item_path>[ ...]] [--^resultformat=<str_format>]
|
||
[--^silent] [--^ignorefailed]
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
item_path Items to checkout. Use double quotes (" ") to specify
|
||
paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to separate
|
||
paths.
|
||
Use . to apply checkout to current directory.
|
||
--^resultformat Retrieves the output result message in a specific
|
||
format.
|
||
--^silent Does not show any output.
|
||
--^ignorefailed If an item cannot be locked (the exclusive checkout
|
||
cannot be performed), the checkout operation will
|
||
continue without it.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_CHECKOUT ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
To checkout an item:
|
||
- The item must be under source code control.
|
||
- The item must be checked in.
|
||
|
||
If locks are configured on the server (lock.conf exists), then each time
|
||
a checkout on a path happens, Unity VCS checks if it meets any of the rules
|
||
and if so, the path will be in exclusive checkout (locked) so that none can
|
||
simultaneously checkout.
|
||
You can get all the locks in the server by using 'cm ^lock ^list'.
|
||
Check the Administrator Guide to learn how locking works:
|
||
https://www.plasticscm.com/download/help/locking
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^checkout pic1.png pic2.png
|
||
(Checkouts 'pic1.png' and 'pic2.png' files.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^co *.png
|
||
(Checkouts all png files.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^checkout .
|
||
(Checkouts current directory.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^checkout -^R c:\workspace\src
|
||
(Recursively checkouts 'src' folder.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_CONFIGURE ==
|
||
Allows you to configure your workspace by loading or unloading items from it.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_CONFIGURE ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^configure <+|-path>[ ...] [--^silent] [--^ignorefailed]
|
||
[--^ignorecase] [--^restorefulldirs]
|
||
[--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
|
||
[--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
|
||
|
||
path Paths to be loaded or unloaded. Use double quotes (" ") to
|
||
specify paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to separate
|
||
paths.
|
||
Paths have to start with "/".
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^silent Does not show any output.
|
||
--^ignorefailed Skips all errors during the process. Incorrect paths
|
||
will not cause the command to stop.
|
||
--^ignorecase Ignores casing on the paths. With this flag, '^configure'
|
||
will work for "/Data/Textures" even if the user writes
|
||
"/data/teXtures".
|
||
--^restorefulldirs Resets an invalid directory configuration (happens when
|
||
a non-partial operation is run on a partial workspace).
|
||
The directories in this list will be fully configured
|
||
(full check) which means they will automatically
|
||
download new content during the update.
|
||
This operation does not download any files, just
|
||
restores the directory configuration on partial
|
||
workspaces.
|
||
--^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
|
||
--^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
|
||
the lines should start.
|
||
--^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
|
||
the lines should end.
|
||
--^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
|
||
the fields should be separated.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_CONFIGURE ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
The command assumes recursive operation.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^configure +/landscape_grey.png
|
||
(Loads 'landscape_grey.png' item.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^configure -/landscape_black.png
|
||
(Unloads 'landscape_black.png' item.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^configure +/soft -/soft/soft-black.png
|
||
(Loads all 'soft' directory children items except 'soft-black.png'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^configure -/
|
||
(Unloads the whole workspace.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^configure -/ +/
|
||
(Loads the whole workspace.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^configure -/figure-64.png --^ignorefailed
|
||
(Unloads 'figure-64.png' item even if it was already unloaded.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^configure +/ --^restorefulldirs
|
||
(Sets all directories to automatically download the new content.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^configure +/src/lib --^restorefulldirs
|
||
(Sets only '/src/lib' and its subdirectories to automatically download the
|
||
new content.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_MOVE ==
|
||
Moves or renames a file or directory.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_MOVE ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^move | ^mv <src_path> <dst_path> [--^format=<str_format>]
|
||
|
||
src_path Source item path.
|
||
dst_path Destination item path.
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
|
||
Remarks for more info.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_MOVE ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
This command moves or renames an item in the repository.
|
||
Changes are done in the local filesystem too.
|
||
|
||
If the source path is a file, the destination path can be a file or a
|
||
directory. In the first case, the file will be renamed; otherwise, the item
|
||
will be moved.
|
||
If source path is a directory, the destination path must be a directory.
|
||
|
||
The item to move or rename must exist.
|
||
|
||
Format:
|
||
{0} Source path.
|
||
{1} Destination path.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^move file.png file-blue.png
|
||
(Renames the item.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^mv .\file-blue.png .\blueFiles
|
||
(Moves 'file-blue.png' to 'blueFiles'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^move .\design .\marketing
|
||
(Renames a directory.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_RM ==
|
||
Deletes a file or directory from version control.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_RM ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^remove | ^rm <item_path>[ ...] [--^nodisk]
|
||
|
||
item_path Items path to remove. Use double quotes (" ") to
|
||
specify paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to separate
|
||
paths.
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^nodisk Removes from version control, but keeps the item on disk.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_RM ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
Items are deleted from disk. Removed items are removed from the parent
|
||
directory in the source code control.
|
||
|
||
Requirements:
|
||
- The item must be under source code control.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^remove src
|
||
(Removes 'src'. If 'src' is a directory, this is the same that:
|
||
cm ^partial ^remove -^R src.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^remove c:\workspace\pic01.png --^nodisk
|
||
(Removes 'pic01.png' from version control, but keeps it on disk.)
|
||
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_SHELVESET ==
|
||
Allows the user to manage partial shelvesets.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_SHELVESET ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^shelveset | ^shelve <command> [options]
|
||
|
||
Commands:
|
||
|
||
^create | ^mk
|
||
^apply
|
||
^delete | ^rm
|
||
|
||
To get more information about each command run:
|
||
cm ^partial ^shelveset <command> --^usage
|
||
cm ^partial ^shelveset <command> --^help
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_SHELVESET ==
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^shelveset ^create -^c="my comment"
|
||
cm ^partial ^shelveset ^apply sh:3
|
||
cm ^partial ^shelveset ^delete sh:5
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_SHELVESET_CREATE ==
|
||
Shelves chosen pending changes.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_SHELVESET_CREATE ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^shelveset | ^shelve ^create | ^mk [<item_path>[ ...]]
|
||
[-^c=<str_comment> | -^commentsfile=<comments_file>]
|
||
[--^applychanged] [--^symlink] [--^ignorefailed]
|
||
[--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
|
||
[--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
item_path Items to shelve. Use double quotes (" ") to specify
|
||
paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to separate
|
||
paths. Use . to apply shelve to current directory.
|
||
-^c Specifies a comment to the changeset created in the
|
||
shelve operation.
|
||
-^commentsfile Applies the comment from the specified file to the
|
||
changeset created in the shelve operation.
|
||
--^applychanged Applies the shelve operation to the changed items
|
||
detected in the workspace along with the checked out
|
||
items.
|
||
--^symlink Applies the shelve operation to the symlink and not to
|
||
the target.
|
||
--^ignorefailed Any changes that cannot be applied (because the lock
|
||
- a.k.a. exclusive checkout - cannot be adquired or
|
||
because local changes are in conflict with the server
|
||
changes) are discarded and the shelve operation
|
||
continues without them.
|
||
--^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
|
||
--^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
|
||
the lines should start.
|
||
--^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
|
||
the lines should end.
|
||
--^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
|
||
the fields should be separated.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_SHELVESET_CREATE ==
|
||
The '^partial ^shelveset ^create' command stores the contents of checked out items
|
||
inside the repository. This way the contents are protected without the need to
|
||
checkin the files.
|
||
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
If neither <item_path> nor any option is specified, the shelveset will
|
||
include all the pending changes in the workspace.
|
||
|
||
The '^partial ^shelveset ^create' operation is always applied recursively from
|
||
the given path.
|
||
|
||
The '^partial ^shelveset ^create' operation is the default, which means that,
|
||
if no other operation is defined, the command will try to perform a creation.
|
||
|
||
Requirements to shelve an item:
|
||
- The item must be under source code control.
|
||
- The item must be checked out or changed.
|
||
|
||
Set the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable to specify an editor for
|
||
entering comments. If the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable is set, and
|
||
the comment is empty, the editor will be automatically launched to allow
|
||
you to specify the comment.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^shelveset figure.png landscape.png
|
||
(Creates a new shelveset with 'figure.png' and 'landscape.png' checked-out files.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^shelveset . -^commentsfile=mycomment.txt
|
||
(Creates a new shelveset with every checked-out file in current directory
|
||
and sets the comment from the 'mycomment.txt' file.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^shelve background.png -^c="my comment"
|
||
(Creates a new shelveset with 'background.png', includes a comment.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^shelveset --^applychanged
|
||
(Creates a new shelveset all pending changes in the workspace.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^shelveset link --^symlink
|
||
(Creates a new shelveset with the symlink file and not the target.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^shelveset . --^ignorefailed
|
||
(Creates a new shelveset with every checked-out file in current directory,
|
||
ignoring (skipping) the changes that cannot be applied.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_SHELVESET_APPLY ==
|
||
Applies a stored shelveset.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_SHELVESET_APPLY ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^shelveset ^apply <sh_spec> [--^encoding=<name>]
|
||
[--^comparisonmethod=(^ignoreeol | ^ignorewhitespaces| \
|
||
^ignoreeolandwhitespaces | ^recognizeall)]
|
||
|
||
sh_spec Shelveset specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to
|
||
learn more about shelveset specs.)
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^encoding Specifies the output encoding, i.e.: utf-8.
|
||
See the MSDN documentation at
|
||
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
|
||
to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
|
||
(at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
|
||
--^comparisonmethod Sets the comparison method. See Remarks for more info.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_SHELVESET_APPLY ==
|
||
The '^partial ^shelveset ^apply' command restores the contents of a stored shelveset.
|
||
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
Comparison methods:
|
||
^ignoreeol Ignores end of line differences.
|
||
^ignorewhitespaces Ignores whitespace differences.
|
||
^ignoreeolandwhitespaces Ignores end of line and whitespace differences.
|
||
^recognizeall Detects end of line and whitespace differences.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^shelveset ^apply ^sh:3
|
||
(Applies a stored shelve.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_SHELVESET_DELETE ==
|
||
Deletes a shelveset.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_SHELVESET_DELETE ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^shelveset ^delete | ^rm <sh_spec>
|
||
|
||
sh_spec Shelveset specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to
|
||
learn more about shelveset specs.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_SHELVESET_DELETE ==
|
||
The '^partial ^shelveset ^delete' command deletes a shelveset.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^shelveset ^delete ^sh:3
|
||
(Removes a stored shelveset.)
|
||
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_SWITCH ==
|
||
Sets a branch as the working branch.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_SWITCH ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^switch <branch_spec> [--^report | --^silent] [--^workspace=<path>]
|
||
[--^noinput]
|
||
(Sets the working branch and updates the workspace.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^switch <branch_spec> --^configure <+|-path>[ ...] [--^silent]
|
||
[--^ignorefailed] [--^ignorecase] [--^workspace=<path>]
|
||
(Sets the working branch and runs a workspace configuration like the 'cm
|
||
^partial ^configure' command does.)
|
||
|
||
branch_spec Branch specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn
|
||
more about branch specs.)
|
||
path Paths to be loaded or unloaded. Use double quotes (" ")
|
||
to specify paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to
|
||
separate paths. Paths must start with "/".
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^silent Does not show any output.
|
||
--^report Prints a list of the applied changes when the command
|
||
is finished. Using '--^silent' will override this setting.
|
||
This option only works when the '--^configure' option
|
||
is not specified.
|
||
--^configure Configures (loads / unloads items) the workspace
|
||
after updating the working branch. Check 'cm ^partial
|
||
^configure --^help' to learn how to specify the paths
|
||
to configure.
|
||
--^ignorefailed Skips all errors during the configuration process.
|
||
Incorrect paths will not cause the command to stop.
|
||
--^ignorecase Ignores casing on the paths. With this flag, option
|
||
'--^configure' works for "/Data/Textures" even if the user
|
||
writes "/data/teXtures".
|
||
--^noinput Skips the interactive question to continue the
|
||
operation shelving the pending changes.
|
||
--^workspace=path Path where the workspace is located.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_SWITCH ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
This command allows users to update the working branch. After updating the
|
||
branch, the command updates the workspace to the new branch as the
|
||
'cm ^partial ^update' command would do. However, if the '--^configure' option is
|
||
specified, the command allows to configure the workspace using the new
|
||
branch configuration as the 'cm ^partial ^configure' command would do.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^switch ^br:/main/task
|
||
(Sets /main/task as working branch and updates the workspace.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^switch ^br:/main/task --^configure +/art/images
|
||
(Sets /main/task as working branch and configures the workspace to
|
||
load the /art/images folder.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_UNCO ==
|
||
Undoes the checkout on an item.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_UNCO ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^undocheckout | ^unco <item_path>[ ...] [--^silent]
|
||
[--^keepchanges | -^k]
|
||
|
||
item_path Items to apply the operation. Use double quotes (" ")
|
||
to specify paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to
|
||
separate paths.
|
||
Use . to apply the operation to current directory.
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^silent Does not show any output.
|
||
--^keepchanges (-^k) Undoes the checkout and preserves the local changes.
|
||
Sample: undo the checkout of a file leave it as locally
|
||
changed with the same content on disk that it was.
|
||
This option cannot be used with dynamic workspaces.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_UNCO ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
If an item is checked-out and you do not want to checkin it, you can undo
|
||
the checkout using this command. Both files and folders can be unchecked
|
||
out. The item will be updated to the state it had before checking it out.
|
||
|
||
Requirements:
|
||
- The item must be under source code control.
|
||
- The item must be checked out.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^undocheckout .
|
||
(Undoes checkouts in the current directory.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^undocheckout pic1.png pic2.png
|
||
cm ^unco c:\workspace\design01.png
|
||
(Undoes checkouts of the selected files.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_UNDO ==
|
||
Undoes changes in a workspace.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_UNDO ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^undo [<path>[ ...]] [--^symlink] [-^r | --^recursive]
|
||
[<filter>[ ...]]
|
||
[--^silent | --^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
|
||
[--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
|
||
|
||
path Path of the files or directories to apply the
|
||
operation to. Use double quotes (" ") to specify
|
||
paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to
|
||
separate paths.
|
||
If no path is specified, by default the undo
|
||
operation will take all of the files in the current
|
||
directory.
|
||
filter Applies the specified filter or filters to the given
|
||
paths. Use a whitespace to separate filters. See the
|
||
Filters section for more information.
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^symlink Applies the undo operation to the symlink and not
|
||
to the target.
|
||
-^r Executes the undo recursively.
|
||
--^silent Does not show any output.
|
||
--^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
|
||
--^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies
|
||
how the lines should start.
|
||
--^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies
|
||
how the lines should end.
|
||
--^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies
|
||
how the fields should be separated.
|
||
|
||
Filters:
|
||
|
||
If no flag is specified, by default, all changes are undone, but the
|
||
paths can be filtered using one or more of the flags below.
|
||
If a file or directory matches one or more of the specified kinds of change,
|
||
all of the changes on said file or directory will be undone.
|
||
For example, if you specify both '--^checkedout' and '--^moved', if a file is
|
||
both checkedout and moved, both changes will be undone.
|
||
|
||
--^checkedout Select checked-out files and directories.
|
||
--^unchanged Select files whose content is unchanged.
|
||
--^changed Select locally changed or checked-out files and
|
||
directories.
|
||
--^deleted Select deleted files and directories.
|
||
--^moved Select moved files and directories.
|
||
--^added Select added files and directories.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_UNDO ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
The ^undo command is dangerous - it undoes work in an irreversible way.
|
||
Once the ^undo has finished, it is not possible to recover the previous state
|
||
of the files and directories affected by it. If no path is specified
|
||
in the arguments, by default it will undo every change in the current
|
||
directory, but not recursively.
|
||
These are equivalent when executed from the /src directory:
|
||
|
||
/src
|
||
|- file.txt
|
||
|- code.cs
|
||
\- /test
|
||
|- test_a.py
|
||
\- test_b.py
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^undo
|
||
cm ^partial ^undo *
|
||
cm ^partial ^undo file.txt code.cs /test
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^undo .
|
||
cm ^partial ^undo /src file.txt code.cs
|
||
|
||
If you want the operation to be recursive, you must specify the '-^r' flag.
|
||
|
||
To undo all of the changes below a directory (including changes affecting
|
||
the directory itself):
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^undo dirpath -^r
|
||
|
||
If dirpath is a workspace path, every change in the workspace will be
|
||
undone.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^undo . -^r
|
||
(Undoes all changes in the current directory recursively. If executed
|
||
from the workspace's root, undoes all changes in the entire workspace.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^co file.txt
|
||
cm ^partial ^undo file.txt
|
||
(Undoes the checkout on file.txt.)
|
||
|
||
^echo ^content >> file.txt
|
||
cm ^partial ^undo file.txt
|
||
(Undoes the local change to file.txt.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^undo src
|
||
(Undoes changes to the src directory and its files.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^undo src/*
|
||
(Undo changes in every file and directory contained in src, without
|
||
affecting src.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^undo *.cs
|
||
(Undo changes to every file or directory that matches *.cs in the current
|
||
directory.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^undo *.cs -^r
|
||
(Undoes changes on every file or directory that matches *.cs in the current
|
||
directory and every directory below it.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^co file1.txt file2.txt
|
||
^echo ^content >> file1.txt
|
||
cm ^partial ^undo --^unchanged
|
||
(Undoes the checkout of unchanged file2.txt, ignoring locally changed
|
||
file1.txt.)
|
||
|
||
^echo ^content >> file1.txt
|
||
^echo ^content >> file2.txt
|
||
cm ^partial ^co file1.txt
|
||
cm ^partial ^undo --^checkedout
|
||
(Undoes the changes in checked-out file file1.txt, ignoring file2.txt as it is
|
||
not checked-out.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^add file.txt
|
||
cm ^partial ^undo file.txt
|
||
(Undoes the add of file.txt, making it once again a private file.)
|
||
|
||
^rm file1.txt
|
||
^echo ^content >> file2.txt
|
||
cm ^partial ^add file3.txt
|
||
cm ^partial ^undo --^deleted --^added *
|
||
(Undoes the file1.txt delete and file3.txt add, ignoring the file2.txt
|
||
change.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_UPDATE ==
|
||
Updates the partial workspace and downloads latest changes.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_UPDATE ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^update [<item_path>[ ...]] [--^changeset=<number>]
|
||
[--^silent | --^report] [--^dontmerge]
|
||
[--^xml[=<output_file>]]
|
||
[--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
|
||
[--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
|
||
|
||
item_path Items to be updated. Use double quotes (" ") to specify
|
||
paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to separate
|
||
paths.
|
||
Use . to apply update to current directory.
|
||
If no path is specified, then the current partial
|
||
workspace is fully updated.
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^changeset Updates the partial workspace to a specific changeset.
|
||
--^silent No output is shown unless an error happens.
|
||
--^xml Prints the output in XML format to the standard
|
||
output. It is possible to specify an output file.
|
||
--^report Prints a list of the applied changes when the command
|
||
is finished. Using '--^silent' will override this setting.
|
||
--^dontmerge Does not merge the file conflicts, it just skips them.
|
||
The other changes are properly applied. This option can
|
||
be useful for automation to avoid user interaction.
|
||
--^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
|
||
--^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
|
||
specifies how the lines should start.
|
||
--^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
|
||
specifies how the lines should end.
|
||
--^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
|
||
specifies how the fields should be separated.
|
||
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_UPDATE ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
The '^partial ^update' command updates the out-of-date files.
|
||
|
||
The command assumes recursive operation.
|
||
|
||
If all the specified paths are files inside the same Xlink when using the
|
||
'--^changeset' option, then the versions to download are searched in the
|
||
specified changeset of the Xlinked repository.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^update
|
||
(Updates all in the current partial workspace.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^update .
|
||
(Updates all current directory children items.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^update backgroud-blue.png
|
||
(Updates 'backgroud-blue.png' item.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^update soft_black.png soft-grey.png
|
||
(Updates 'soft_black.png' and 'soft-grey.png' items.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^update src --^report
|
||
(Updates all 'src' directory children items, printing the applied changes
|
||
list at the end.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^update src --^changeset=4
|
||
(Updates all 'src' directory children items to the content they loaded
|
||
in the changeset 4.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^update xlink/first.png --^changeset=4
|
||
(Updates 'xlink/first.png' item to the content it loaded in the changeset 4
|
||
of the Xlinked repository.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^partial ^update . --^changeset=2 --^xml=output.xml 2>errors.txt
|
||
(Updates all current directory children items to the content they loaded
|
||
in the changeset 2, reporting the result in XML format. The output is stored
|
||
in a file named 'output.xml' and errors are redirected to the file 'errors.txt'.
|
||
NOTE: redirection syntax rely on the shell.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PATCH ==
|
||
Generates a patch file from a spec or applies a generated patch to the current
|
||
workspace.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_PATCH ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^patch <source_spec> [<source_spec>] [--^output=<output_file>]
|
||
[--^tool=<path_to_diff>]
|
||
Generates a patch file that contains the differences of a branch,
|
||
a changeset, or the differences between changesets. It also tracks
|
||
differences of text and binary files.
|
||
|
||
cm ^patch --^apply <patch_file> [--^tool=<path_to_patch>]
|
||
Allows to apply the contents of a generated patch file in the current
|
||
workspace.
|
||
|
||
source_spec Full spec of a changeset or a branch. (Use
|
||
'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
|
||
output_file File to save the patch content. It no file is specified,
|
||
the patch content will be printed on standard output.
|
||
patch_file Patch file to apply in the current workspace.
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^output Sets the output file of the patch command.
|
||
--^tool Sets the application to use (diff or patch).
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_PATCH ==
|
||
Limitations:
|
||
|
||
If the output patch file already exists, the command will not overwrite it.
|
||
|
||
When applying a patch, the command will not apply changes to modified files
|
||
if they are not present on disk.
|
||
|
||
Important:
|
||
|
||
This command requires Diff and Patch tools, publicly available at
|
||
http://gnuwin32.sourceforge.net/packages/patch.htm and
|
||
http://gnuwin32.sourceforge.net/packages/diffutils.htm
|
||
|
||
Once installed, it's recommended to add their location to the PATH
|
||
environment variable.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^patch ^cs:4@default@localhost:8084
|
||
(Prints on console the differences of cset 4 in unified format.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^patch ^br:/main --^output=file.patch
|
||
(Generates a patch file with the differences of branch "main".)
|
||
|
||
cm ^patch ^br:/main --^output=file.patch --^tool=C:\gnu\diff.exe
|
||
(Same as above, using a custom exe.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^patch ^cs:2@default ^cs:4@default
|
||
(Prints on console the differences between csets 2 and 4 in unified format.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^patch --^apply file.patch --^tool=C:\gnu\patch.exe
|
||
(Applies the patch in 'file.patch' to the local workspace with a custom exe.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PROFILE ==
|
||
Allows the user to manage server connection profiles.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_PROFILE ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^profile <command> [options]
|
||
|
||
Commands:
|
||
|
||
^list | ^ls
|
||
^create | ^mk
|
||
^delete | ^rm
|
||
|
||
To get more information about each command run:
|
||
cm ^profile <command> --^usage
|
||
cm ^profile <command> --^help
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_PROFILE ==
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^profile
|
||
cm ^profile ^list
|
||
cm ^profile ^create
|
||
cm ^profile ^delete 1
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PROFILE_LIST ==
|
||
Lists the server connection profiles configured on the client.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_PROFILE_LIST ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^profile [^list | ^ls] [--^format=<str_format>]
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format.
|
||
See Remarks for more info.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_PROFILE_LIST ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
Output format parameters (--^format option):
|
||
This command accepts a format string to show the output.
|
||
The output parameters of this command are the following:
|
||
{^index} | {0} Profile index in the profiles list
|
||
{^name} | {1} Profile name
|
||
{^server} | {2} Profile server
|
||
{^user} | {3} Profile user
|
||
{^workingmode} | {4} Profile working mode
|
||
{^securityconfig} | {5} Profile security config
|
||
{^tab} Inserts a tab space
|
||
{^newline} Inserts a new line
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^profile
|
||
(Lists all the profiles using the default format)
|
||
|
||
cm ^profile --^format="{index,2} {server,-20}"
|
||
(Writes the profile index in 2 spaces, aligned to the right, then two blanks,
|
||
and then the repository server in 20 spaces, aligned to the left.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^profile --^format="{0,2} {2,-20}"
|
||
(Writes the same output as the previous example.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PROFILE_CREATE ==
|
||
Creates a new server connection profile.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_PROFILE_CREATE ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^profile [^create | ^mk]
|
||
(Creates a new profile interactively.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^profile [^create | ^mk] --^server=<server_addr> --^username=<username>
|
||
--^password=<password> --^workingmode=<workingmode>
|
||
(Creates a new server connection profile using a user/password
|
||
authentication mode.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^profile [^create | ^mk] --^server=<server_addr> --^username=<username>
|
||
--^token=<token> --^workingmode=SSOWorkingMode
|
||
(Creates a new server connection profile using Single Sign On authentication
|
||
mode.)
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^server Creates the connection profile for the specified server.
|
||
--^username The username that should be used in the connection profile
|
||
--^password The plain-text password that should be used in the connection
|
||
profile. This option is only valid for authentication modes
|
||
that are based on a user and password.
|
||
--^token The plain-text token that should be used in the connection
|
||
profile. This option is only valid for authentication modes
|
||
that are based on a token (SSOWorkingMode for now).
|
||
--^workingmode The target server's authentication mode.
|
||
Available users/security working modes:
|
||
^LDAPWorkingMode (LDAP)
|
||
^UPWorkingMode (User and password)
|
||
^SSOWorkingMode (Single Sign On)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_PROFILE_CREATE ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
When using this command interactively (without options), the client will try
|
||
to connect to the server to obtain the working mode and check the credentials.
|
||
This guarantees that the resulting profile is correct.
|
||
|
||
When specifying the options, the client will generate the connection profile
|
||
without connecting to the server. This is useful when creating connection
|
||
profiles for automation purposes.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^profile ^create
|
||
(Creates a new connection profile interactively.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^profile ^create --^server=plastic.domain.com:8087 --^username=sergio
|
||
--^password=thisissupersecret --^workingmode=LDAPWorkingMode
|
||
(Creates a new connection profile to connect to 'plastic.domain.com:8087'
|
||
using user 'sergio' and password 'thisissupersecret' through LDAP working mode.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^profile ^create --^server=plastic.domain.com:8087 --^username=sergio
|
||
--^token="TOKENAMoKJ9iAA(...)12fssoprov:unityid" --workingmode=^SSOWorkingMode
|
||
(Creates a new connection profile to connect to 'plastic.domain.com:8087'
|
||
using user 'sergio' and the specified token through Single Sign On working mode.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PROFILE_DELETE ==
|
||
Deletes a server connection profile from the client's configuration.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_PROFILE_DELETE ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^profile ^delete | ^rm <index | name>
|
||
cm ^profile ^delete | ^rm --index=<index>
|
||
cm ^profile ^delete | ^rm --name=<name>
|
||
|
||
index Profile index in the profiles list.
|
||
name Profile name.
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--index Used to disambiguate in case a profile has a name that is a number
|
||
--name Used to disambiguate in case a profile has a name that is a number
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_PROFILE_DELETE ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
Deletes a server connection profile from the client's configuration.
|
||
It works both with the profile index and the profile name.
|
||
The 'cm ^profile ^list' command does not show profile names by default,
|
||
check 'cm ^profile ^list --help' to check how to output profile's name.
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
|
||
cm ^profile ^delete 1
|
||
(Removes the profile at index 1.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^profile ^delete 192.168.0.2:8087_UPWorkingMode
|
||
(Removes the profile with name '192.168.0.2:8087_UPWorkingMode'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^profile ^delete --name=12
|
||
(Removes the profile with name '12'.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_QUERY ==
|
||
Executes SQL queries. Requires SQL storage.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_QUERY ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^query <sql_command> [--^outputfile=<output_file>]
|
||
[--^solveuser=<column_name>[,...]]
|
||
[--^solvepath=<column_name>[,...]]
|
||
[--^columnwidth=<value>] [--^nocolumnname]
|
||
[--^columnseparator=<sep>] [--^repository=<name>]
|
||
|
||
sql_command The sql query to be executed.
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^outputfile Writes the result in an output file.
|
||
--^solveuser Sets the specified columns as username columns. The
|
||
query interpreter will assume that data of these columns
|
||
will be users, and will try to solve them.
|
||
--^solvepath Sets the specified columns as itemid column. The query
|
||
interpreter will try to solve item id to filesystem
|
||
paths.
|
||
--^columnwidth Specifies the width of each column to format the output.
|
||
--^nocolumnname Does not print column name.
|
||
--^columnseparator Uses char as column separator instead of a tab (\t).
|
||
--^repository Repository to query.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_QUERY ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
This command allows users to execute SQL queries in the server database.
|
||
|
||
In order to write SQL queries, use these two pre-defined functions to manage
|
||
users and paths:
|
||
- '^SolveUser(<username>)' that resolves a username into Unity VCS format.
|
||
- '^SolvePath(<path>)' that resolves a disk path into an item id.
|
||
|
||
Also, you can use options to show query results in a human readable form.
|
||
|
||
You can use the options '--^solveuser=<column_name>' and
|
||
'--^solvepath=<column_name>' to specify columns that query interpreter
|
||
must convert to a legible text. You can specify more than one column name,
|
||
comma separated.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^query "^SELECT * ^FROM ^revision" --^columnwidth=25 --^repository=reptest
|
||
(Retrieves data from 'revision' table from repository 'reptest'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^query "^SELECT b.^sname ^as br_name, o.^dtimestamp ^as date ^from ^branch b, \
|
||
^object o, ^seid s ^where b.^iobjid=o.^iobjid ^and o.^fidowner=s.^iseidid ^and \
|
||
s.^scode='^SolveUser(john)'" --^outputfile=query.txt
|
||
(Outputs into a file the branches with owner 'john'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^query "^select r.^iobjid, r.^fiditem ^as path, s.^scode ^as username ^FROM \
|
||
^revision r, ^object o, ^seid s ^WHERE r.^iobjid=o.^iobjid ^and \
|
||
o.^fidowner=s.^iseidid ^and o.^dtimestamp>04/25/2014" \
|
||
--^solveuser=username --^solvepath=path --^repository=reptest@server2:9095
|
||
(Retrieves selected data from selected repository.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^query "^SELECT * ^FROM ^revision ^WHERE ^fiditem=^SolvePath(c:\mywkpath\info)"
|
||
(Retrieves all revision data of path 'info'.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_ATTRIBUTE_DELETE ==
|
||
Deletes one or more attributes.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_ATTRIBUTE_DELETE ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^attribute | ^att ^delete | ^rm <att_spec>[ ...]
|
||
|
||
att_spec Attributes to delete. Use a whitespace to separate
|
||
attributes.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about attribute
|
||
specs.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_ATTRIBUTE_DELETE ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
This command removes one or more attributes.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^attribute ^delete ^att:status
|
||
(Deletes the attribute 'status'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^att ^rm status ^att:integrated@reptest@server2:8084
|
||
(Deletes the attributes 'status' and 'integrated'.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_ATTRIBUTE_UNSET ==
|
||
Unsets an object's attribute.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_ATTRIBUTE_UNSET ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^attribute | ^att ^unset <att_spec> <object_spec>
|
||
|
||
att_spec Attribute specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to
|
||
learn more about attribute specs.)
|
||
object_spec Specification of the object to remove the attribute
|
||
from. Attributes can be set on: branches, changesets,
|
||
shelvesets, labels, items, and revisions.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_ATTRIBUTE_UNSET ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
The command unsets an attribute that was previously set on an object. It
|
||
does not delete the attribute object itself.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^attribute ^unset ^att:status ^br:/main/SCM105
|
||
(Removes attribute realization 'status' from branch 'main/SCM105'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^att ^unset ^att:integrated@reptest@localhost:8084 ^cs:25@reptest@localhost:8084
|
||
(Removes attribute realization 'integrated' from changeset 25, all in
|
||
repository 'reptest'.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_ATTRIBUTE_RENAME ==
|
||
Renames an attribute.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_ATTRIBUTE_RENAME ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^attribute | ^att ^rename <att_spec> <new_name>
|
||
|
||
att_spec Attribute to rename. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn
|
||
more about attribute specs.)
|
||
new_name New name for the attribute.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_ATTRIBUTE_RENAME ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
This command renames an attribute.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^attribute ^rename ^att:status state
|
||
(Renames the attribute 'status' to 'state'.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_ATTRIBUTE_EDIT ==
|
||
Edits the comment of an attribute.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_ATTRIBUTE_EDIT ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^attribute | ^att ^edit <att_spec> <new_comment>
|
||
|
||
att_spec Attribute to change its comment. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec'
|
||
to learn more about attribute specs.)
|
||
new_comment New comment for the attribute. You can also specify a
|
||
default list of values for the attribute. See Remarks for
|
||
more info.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_ATTRIBUTE_EDIT ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
This command changes the comment of an attribute.
|
||
|
||
To specify a default list of values for the attribute, you just need to
|
||
include a line like the following in the attribute comment:
|
||
'default: value_one, "value two", value3, "Final value"'.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^attribute ^edit ^att:status "The status of a branch in the CI pipeline."
|
||
(Edits the comment of the attribute 'status'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^attribute ^edit ^att:status "Status of a branch. default: open, resolved, reviewed"
|
||
(Edits the comment of the attribute 'status'. And also specifies a list of
|
||
values. So when you set the attribute 'status' to an object, you can select
|
||
one of the following values: "open", "resolved", or "reviewed".)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PULL ==
|
||
Pulls a branch from another repo.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_PULL ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^pull <src_br_spec> <dst_rep_spec>
|
||
[--^preview] [--^nodata] [TranslateOptions]
|
||
[--^user=<usr_name> [--^password=<pwd>] | AuthOptions]
|
||
(Direct server-to-server replication. Pulls a branch from a repository.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^pull <dst_rep_spec> --^package=<pack_file> [AuthOptions]
|
||
(Package based replication. Imports the package in the destination repository.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^pull ^hydrate <dst_br_spec> [<src_rep_spec>]
|
||
[--^user=<usr_name> [--^password=<pwd>] | AuthOptions]
|
||
(Introduces the missing data for all the changesets of a branch previously
|
||
replicated with '--^nodata'. If a repo to obtain the data is not specified,
|
||
Unity VCS tries to use the "replication source" (origin of the replicated
|
||
branch)).
|
||
|
||
cm ^pull ^hydrate <dst_cs_spec> [<src_rep_spec>]
|
||
[--^user=<usr_name> [--^password=<pwd>] | AuthOptions]
|
||
(Introduces the missing data for a changeset previously replicated with
|
||
'--^nodata'. If a repo to obtain the data is not specified, Unity VCS tries
|
||
to use the "replication source").
|
||
|
||
src_br_spec The branch to pull from a remote repository.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about branch specs.)
|
||
dst_br_spec The branch to hydrate.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about branch specs.)
|
||
dst_cs_spec The changeset to hydrate.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about changeset
|
||
specs.)
|
||
dst_rep_spec The destination repository.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repository
|
||
specs.)
|
||
--^package Specifies the previously created package file to import
|
||
for package based replication.
|
||
Useful to move data between servers when there is no
|
||
direct network connection.
|
||
Refer to 'cm ^push' to create a package file.
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^preview Gives information about what changes will be pulled but
|
||
no changes are actually performed. This option is useful
|
||
to check the data that will be transferred before
|
||
replicating changes.
|
||
--^nodata Replicates the branch changes without replicating the
|
||
data. This option is not allowed with package
|
||
replication.
|
||
TranslateOptions See the Translate options section for more information.
|
||
--^user, --^password Credentials to use if the authentication mode is
|
||
different in source and destination and there is not a
|
||
profile to authenticate to destination.
|
||
AuthOptions See the Authentication options section for more
|
||
information.
|
||
|
||
Translate options:
|
||
|
||
--^trmode=(^copy|^name|^table --^trtable=<translation_table_file>)
|
||
The source and destination repositories may use different authentication
|
||
modes. The '--^trmode' option specifies how to translate the user names from
|
||
the source to the destination. The '--^trmode' must be one of the following
|
||
values:
|
||
^copy (Default). Means that the user identifiers will be just copied.
|
||
^name The user identifiers will be matched by name.
|
||
^table Uses a translation table specified in the option '--^trtable'
|
||
(see below).
|
||
|
||
--^trtable=<translation_table_file>
|
||
If the translation mode is 'table', a translation table is a file
|
||
containing lines in the form <oldname;newname> (one per line). When the
|
||
branch is written to the destination repository, the objects created by
|
||
a user identified by "oldname" in the source repository will be set
|
||
to the user with "newname" on the destination.
|
||
|
||
Authentication options:
|
||
|
||
Authentication data can be specified using one of the two following modes:
|
||
|
||
1) Using authentication parameters: --^authmode=<mode> --^authdata=<data>
|
||
|
||
--^authmode=(^NameWorkingMode|^LDAPWorkingMode|^ADWorkingMode|^UPWorkingMode)
|
||
Examples:
|
||
(^LDAPWorkingMode) --^authdata=::0:dave:fPBea2rPsQaagEW3pKNveA
|
||
(^UPWorkingMode) --^authdata=dave:fPBea2rPsQaagEW3pKNveA==
|
||
|
||
The '--^authdata' line is the content of the <^SecurityConfig> entry
|
||
in the client.conf file and the profiles.conf file. The profiles.conf
|
||
file can be easily generated from the Unity VCS GUI in the replication
|
||
profiles tab under Preferences.
|
||
|
||
If you are using ^UPWorkingMode, you can simply specify:
|
||
|
||
--^authmode=^UPWorkingMode --^user=<user> --^password=<psw>
|
||
|
||
2) Authentication file where you may have a different file for each server
|
||
you connect to, containing the credentials for that server.
|
||
|
||
--^authfile=<authentication_file>
|
||
The file contains 2 lines:
|
||
Line 1) mode, as described in '--^authmode'
|
||
Line 2) authentication data, as described in '--^authdata'
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_PULL ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
The '^pull' command is able to replicate branches (along with their
|
||
changesets) between a source repository and a destination repository.
|
||
The repositories can be located at different servers.
|
||
|
||
There are two replication operations: '^push' and '^pull'.
|
||
|
||
A '^pull' operation means that the replication operation will demand data
|
||
from the source repository to be stored into the destination repository.
|
||
The client will connect to the destination repository and, from that host,
|
||
it will establish a connection to the source repository to retrieve the
|
||
targeted data. During pull it is the destination server which will be
|
||
connected to the source.
|
||
|
||
Although in a typical distributed scenario a developer pushes data from his
|
||
local server to the main server, the developer might want to pull the latest
|
||
repository updates from the main server, too.
|
||
|
||
Replication can resolve situations where concurrent changes have been made
|
||
on the same branch on two replicated repositories:
|
||
|
||
- Push: If you try to push your data to a repository having newer changes
|
||
than those you are sending, the system will ask you to pull the latest
|
||
changes, resolve the merge operation and, finally, try to push again.
|
||
|
||
- Pull: Whenever you pull changesets from a remote branch, they will be
|
||
correctly linked to their parent changesets. If the changeset you pulled
|
||
is not a child of the last changeset in the branch, then a multi-headed
|
||
scenario will appear. The branch will have more than one 'head', or last
|
||
changeset on the branch. You will need to merge the two 'heads' before
|
||
being able to push again.
|
||
|
||
Pull can work in two modes:
|
||
|
||
1) Direct communication between servers: The destination server will fetch
|
||
the data from the source server, automatically synchronizing data for
|
||
the specified branch.
|
||
|
||
2) Import a previously generated package with push and the '--^package' option.
|
||
|
||
Mode 1) requires the user running the command to be authenticated
|
||
by the remote server, either using the default authentication in the
|
||
client.conf file, or specifiying the '--^authmode' and '--^authdata' modifiers,
|
||
or '--^authmode' and '--^user' and '--^password' if the authentication mode is
|
||
^UPWorkingMode.
|
||
|
||
Mode 2) requires using a package file previously generated with the push
|
||
command.
|
||
|
||
Keep in mind that pull replication works in an indirect way. When executed,
|
||
the command asks the destination repository to connect to the source and
|
||
obtain the selected branch.
|
||
|
||
However, this can be done directly by using the push command.
|
||
This will make the command replicate the selected branch from source to
|
||
destination.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^pull ^br:/main@project1@remoteserver:8084 projectx@myserver:8084
|
||
(Pulls the 'main' branch from 'remoteserver' to 'myserver'. In this case,
|
||
both servers are configured with the same authentication mode.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^pull ^br:/main@project1@remoteserver:8084 projectx@myserver:8084 \
|
||
--^authmode=^LDAPWorkingMode --^authdata=::0:dave:fPBea2rPsQaagEW3pKNveA
|
||
(Pulls the same branch as before, but now the remote server is configured
|
||
to authenticate users with Active Directory. For instance, I am connecting
|
||
from a Linux machine to a Windows server configured to use Active Directory
|
||
integrated mode. I will specify my Active Directory user and cyphered
|
||
password and pass it as LDAP to the server.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^pull ^br:/main@project1@remoteserver:8084 projectx@myserver:8084 \
|
||
--^authmode=^UPWorkingMode --^user=dave --^password=mysecret
|
||
(Pulls the same branch, but now users are authenticated on the remote
|
||
server, taking advantage of the user/password database included in
|
||
Unity VCS.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^pull ^br:/main@project1@remoteserver:8084 projectx@myserver:8084 --^nodata
|
||
(Replicates the 'main' branch from 'remoteserver' to 'myserver' without data.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^pull ^hydrate ^br:/main@projectx@myserver:8084 projectx@remoteserver:8084
|
||
(Hydrates all the changesets in the 'main' branch obtaining the data from
|
||
the remote server.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^pull ^hydrate ^cs:122169@projectx@myserver:8084 projectx@remoteserver:8084
|
||
(Hydrates changeset 122169 in 'myserver' obtaining the data from the remote
|
||
server.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PUSH ==
|
||
Pushes a branch to another repo.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_PUSH ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^push <src_br_spec> <dst_rep_spec>
|
||
[--^preview] [TranslateOptions]
|
||
[--^user=<usr_name> [--^password=<pwd>] | AuthOptions]
|
||
(Direct server-to-server replication. Pushes a branch from a repository.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^push <src_br_spec> --^package=<pack_file> [AuthOptions]
|
||
(Package based replication. Creates a replication package in the source
|
||
server with the selected branch.)
|
||
|
||
src_br_spec The branch to push to a remote repository.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about branch specs.)
|
||
dst_rep_spec The destination repository.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repository
|
||
specs.)
|
||
--^package Specifies path for exporting replication package for
|
||
package based replication.
|
||
Useful to move data between servers when there is no
|
||
direct network connection.
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^preview Gives information about what changes will be pushed,
|
||
but no changes are actually performed. This option is
|
||
useful to check the data that will be transferred before
|
||
replicating changes.
|
||
TranslateOptions See the Translate options section for more information.
|
||
--^user, --^password Credentials to use if the authentication mode is
|
||
different in source and destination and there is not a
|
||
profile to authenticate to destination.
|
||
AuthOptions See the Authentication options section for more
|
||
information.
|
||
|
||
Translate options:
|
||
|
||
--^trmode=(^copy|^name|^table --^trtable=<translation_table_file>)
|
||
The source and destination repositories may use different authentication
|
||
modes. The '--^trmode' option specifies how to translate the user names
|
||
from the source to the destination. The '--^trmode' must be one of the
|
||
following values:
|
||
^copy (Default). Means that the user identifiers will be just copied.
|
||
^name The user identifiers will be matched by name.
|
||
^table Uses a translation table specified in the option '--^trtable'
|
||
(see below).
|
||
|
||
--^trtable=<translation_table_file>
|
||
If the translation mode is 'table', a translation table is a file
|
||
containing lines in the form <oldname;newname> (one per line). When the
|
||
branch is written to the destination repository, the objects created by
|
||
a user identified by "oldname" in the source repository will be set
|
||
to the user with "newname" on the destination.
|
||
|
||
Authentication options:
|
||
|
||
Authentication data can be specified using one of the two following modes:
|
||
|
||
1) Using authentication parameters: --^authmode=<mode> --^authdata=<data>
|
||
|
||
--^authmode=(^NameWorkingMode|^LDAPWorkingMode|^ADWorkingMode|^UPWorkingMode)
|
||
Examples:
|
||
(^LDAPWorkingMode) --^authdata=::0:dave:fPBea2rPsQaagEW3pKNveA
|
||
(^UPWorkingMode) --^authdata=dave:fPBea2rPsQaagEW3pKNveA==
|
||
|
||
The '--^authdata' line is the content of the <^SecurityConfig> entry
|
||
in the client.conf file and the profiles.conf file. The profiles.conf
|
||
file can be easily generated from the Unity VCS in the replication
|
||
profiles tab under Preferences.
|
||
|
||
If you are using ^UPWorkingMode, you can simply specify:
|
||
|
||
--^authmode=^UPWorkingMode --^user=<user> --^password=<psw>
|
||
|
||
2) Authentication file where you may have a different file for each server
|
||
you connect to, containing the credentials for that server.
|
||
|
||
--^authfile=<authentication_file>
|
||
The file contains 2 lines:
|
||
Line 1) mode, as described in '--^authmode'
|
||
Line 2) authentication data, as described in '--^authdata'
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_PUSH ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
The '^push' command is able to replicate branches (along with their
|
||
changesets) between a source repository and a destination repository.
|
||
The repositories can be located at different servers.
|
||
|
||
There are two replication operations: '^push' and '^pull'.
|
||
|
||
A '^push' operation means that the replication operation will send data
|
||
from the source repository to the destination repository. In this case,
|
||
the client will connect to the source repository, getting the data to
|
||
replicate, and then it will send it to the destination repository. While
|
||
the former (source) must have connectivity to the destination, the latter
|
||
(destination) will not connect itself to the source.
|
||
|
||
In a typical distributed scenario, a developer pushes data from his local
|
||
server to the main server. Also, the developer might want to pull the latest
|
||
repository updates from the main server, too.
|
||
|
||
Replication can resolve situations where concurrent changes have
|
||
been made on the same branch on two replicated repositories.
|
||
|
||
- Push: If you try to push your data to a repository having newer changes
|
||
than those you are sending, the system will ask you to pull the latest
|
||
changes, resolve the merge operation and, finally, try to push again.
|
||
|
||
- Pull: Whenever you pull changesets from a remote branch, they will be
|
||
correctly linked to their parent changesets. If the changeset you pulled
|
||
is not a child of the last changeset in the branch, then a multi-headed
|
||
scenario will appear. The branch will have more than one 'head', or last
|
||
changeset on the branch. You will need to merge the two 'heads' before
|
||
being able to push again.
|
||
|
||
Push can work in two modes:
|
||
|
||
1) Direct communication between servers: The origin server will send
|
||
the data to the destination server, automatically synchronizing data
|
||
for the specified branch.
|
||
|
||
2) Export package mode: The client will only connect to the source and
|
||
generate a replication package obtaining both data and metadata for the
|
||
specified branch. The '--^package' modifier will be used.
|
||
|
||
Both modes require the user running the command to be authenticated
|
||
by the server, either using the default authentication in the client.conf
|
||
file, or specifiying the '--^authmode' and '--^authdata' modifiers.
|
||
|
||
The ^push replication works in a direct way. When executed, the command
|
||
will replicate the selected branch from source to destination, instead of
|
||
asking the destination repository to connect to the source and obtain the
|
||
selected branch (as the pull does).
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^push ^br:/main@project1@myserver:8084 projectx@remoteserver:8084
|
||
(Replicates the 'main' branch from 'myserver' to 'remoteserver'. In this case,
|
||
both servers are configured with the same authentication mode.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^push ^br:/main@project1@myserver:8084 projectx@remoteserver:8084 \
|
||
--^authmode=^LDAPWorkingMode --^authdata=::0:dave:fPBea2rPsQaagEW3pKNveA
|
||
(Replicates same branch as before, but now the remote server is configured
|
||
to authenticate users with Active Directory. For instance, I am connecting
|
||
from a Linux machine to a Windows server configured to use Active Directory
|
||
integrated mode. I will specify my Active Directory user and cyphered
|
||
password and pass it as LDAP to the server.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^push ^br:/main@project1@myserver:8084 projectx@remoteserver:8084 \
|
||
--^authmode=^UPWorkingMode --^user=dave --^password=mysecret
|
||
(Replicates the same branch, but now users are authenticated on the remote
|
||
server, taking advantage of the user/password database included in
|
||
Unity VCS.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_CLONE ==
|
||
Clones a remote repository.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_CLONE ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^clone <src_rep_spec> [<dst_rep_spec> | <dst_repserver_spec>]
|
||
[--^user=<usr_name> [--^password=<pwd>] | AuthOptions]
|
||
[TranslateOptions]
|
||
(Direct repository-to-repository clone.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^clone <src_rep_spec> --^package=<pack_file>
|
||
[--^user=<usr_name> [--^password=<pwd>] | AuthOptions]
|
||
(Clones to an intermediate package, that can be imported later using a
|
||
pull into the destination repository.)
|
||
|
||
src_rep_spec Source repository of the clone operation.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repository
|
||
specs.)
|
||
dst_rep_spec Destination repository of the clone operation. If it
|
||
exists, it must be empty. If it does not exist, it will
|
||
be created.
|
||
If it is not specified, the command will use user's
|
||
default repository server.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repository
|
||
specs.)
|
||
dst_repserver_spec Destination repository server of the clone operation.
|
||
If there is a repository with the same name as
|
||
<src_rep_spec> in the destination repository server, it
|
||
must be empty. If there is not, it will be created.
|
||
If it is not specified, the command will use user's
|
||
default repository server.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repository
|
||
server specs.)
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^user, --^password Credentials to use if the authentication mode is
|
||
different in source and destination and there is not a
|
||
profile to authenticate to destination.
|
||
--^package Exports the specified repository to a package file,
|
||
instead of a repository.
|
||
Useful for moving data between servers when there is no
|
||
direct network connection.
|
||
The resulting package must be imported using the
|
||
pull command.
|
||
TranslateOptions See the Translate options section for more information.
|
||
AuthOptions See the Authentication options section for more
|
||
information.
|
||
|
||
Translate options:
|
||
--^trmode=(^copy|^name|^table --^trtable=<translation_table_file>)
|
||
The source and destination repositories may use different authentication
|
||
modes. The '--^trmode' option specifies how to translate the user names from
|
||
the source to the destination. The '--^trmode' must be one of the following
|
||
values:
|
||
^copy (Default.) Means that the user identifiers will be just copied.
|
||
^name The user identifiers will be matched by name.
|
||
^table Uses a translation table specified in the option '--^trtable'
|
||
(see below).
|
||
|
||
--^trtable=<translation_table_file>
|
||
If the translation mode is 'table', a translation table is a file
|
||
containing lines in the form <oldname;newname> (one per line). When the
|
||
branch is written to the destination repository, the objects created by
|
||
a user identified by "oldname" in the source repository will be set
|
||
to the user with "newname" on the destination.
|
||
|
||
Authentication options:
|
||
|
||
Authentication data can be specified using one of the two following modes:
|
||
|
||
1) Using authentication parameters: --^authmode=<mode> --^authdata=<data>
|
||
|
||
--^authmode=(^NameWorkingMode|^LDAPWorkingMode|^ADWorkingMode|^UPWorkingMode)
|
||
Examples:
|
||
(^LDAPWorkingMode) --^authdata=::0:dave:fPBea2rPsQaagEW3pKNveA
|
||
(^UPWorkingMode) --^authdata=dave:fPBea2rPsQaagEW3pKNveA==
|
||
|
||
The '--^authdata' line is the content of the <^SecurityConfig> entry
|
||
in the client.conf file and the profiles.conf file. The profiles.conf
|
||
file can be easily generated from the Unity VCS in the connection
|
||
profiles tab under Preferences.
|
||
|
||
If you are using ^UPWorkingMode, you can simply specify:
|
||
|
||
--^authmode=^UPWorkingMode --^user=<user> --^password=<pwd>
|
||
|
||
2) Authentication file where you may have a different file for each server
|
||
you connect to, containing the credentials for that server.
|
||
|
||
--^authfile=<authentication_file>
|
||
The file contains 2 lines:
|
||
Line 1) mode, as described in '--^authmode'
|
||
Line 2) authentication data, as described in '--^authdata'
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_CLONE ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
The clone command can replicate branches (along with their changesets,
|
||
labels, attributes, reviews, and so on) from a source repository to a
|
||
destination repository. The repositories can be located at different servers.
|
||
|
||
The destination repository can be created beforehand, but if it contains
|
||
previous data, the clone operation will fail.
|
||
|
||
The clone operation does NOT clone repository submodules, nor repositories
|
||
under a Xlink.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^clone awesomeProject@tardis@cloud
|
||
(Clones 'awesomeProject' repository from 'tardis@cloud' organization into
|
||
a local repository with the same name.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^clone repo@server.home:9095 repo-local
|
||
(Clones 'repo' from 'server.home:9095' into 'repo-local' at user's default
|
||
repository server.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^clone project@192.168.111.130:8084 ^repserver:192.168.111.200:9095
|
||
(Clones 'project' repository from '192.168.111.130:8084' into
|
||
'project@192.168.111.200:9095'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^clone project@ldapserver:8084 --authfile=credentials.txt \
|
||
--^trmode=table --^trtable=table.txt
|
||
(Clones 'project' repository from 'ldapserver:8084' using an authentication
|
||
file against the remote repository, and translating users following the
|
||
specified translation table.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^clone project@server.home:9095 --^package=project.plasticpkg
|
||
cm ^repository ^create project@mordor.home:8084
|
||
cm ^pull --^package=project.plasticpkg project@mordor.home:8084
|
||
(Clones 'project' repository from 'server.home:9095' into the package
|
||
'project.plasticpkg', which is later imported through a pull into
|
||
the 'project' repository at 'mordor.home:8084'.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_REVERT ==
|
||
Reverts an item to a previous revision.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_REVERT ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^revert <revspec>
|
||
|
||
revspec Specification of the changeset that contains the
|
||
revision which content will be loaded in the workspace.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about revision
|
||
specs.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_REVERT ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
The item must be checked in.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^revert dir#^cs:0
|
||
cm ^revert C:\mywks\dir\file1.txt#23456
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_REVISION_HISTORY ==
|
||
Displays the history of a file or directory.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_REVISION_HISTORY ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^history | ^hist <item_path>[ ...] [--^long | --^format=<str_format>]
|
||
[--^symlink] [--^xml[=<output_file>]] [--^encoding=<name>]
|
||
[--^moveddeleted]
|
||
|
||
item_path Item's path. Use a whitespace to separate paths. Use
|
||
double quotes (" ") to specify paths containing spaces.
|
||
Paths can be server path revisions too.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^long Shows additional information.
|
||
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
|
||
Remarks for more info. This option cannnot be combined
|
||
with '--^xml'.
|
||
--^symlink Applies the history operation to the symlink and not to
|
||
the target.
|
||
--^xml Prints the output in XML format to the standard output.
|
||
It is possible to specify an output file. This option
|
||
cannot be combined with '--^format'.
|
||
--^encoding Used with the '--^xml' option, specifies the encoding to
|
||
use in the XML output, i.e.: utf-8.
|
||
See the MSDN documentation at
|
||
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
|
||
to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
|
||
(at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
|
||
--^moveddeleted Include move and remove operations in the history.
|
||
--^limit Displays the N most recent revisions for the specified items,
|
||
sorted by date and changeset id. If a negative number is supplied,
|
||
it will return an empty list. If a number higher than the number
|
||
of revisions is supplied, it will return all the available revisions
|
||
regarding that item.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_REVISION_HISTORY ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
This command shows a list of revisions for a given item, and label, branch,
|
||
and comment info for each revision.
|
||
|
||
Output format parameters (--^format option):
|
||
This command accepts a format string to show the output.
|
||
The output parameters of this command are the following:
|
||
{0} | {^date} Date.
|
||
{1} | {^changesetid} Changeset number.
|
||
{2} | {^branch} Branch.
|
||
{4} | {^comment} Comment.
|
||
{5} | {^owner} Owner.
|
||
{6} | {^id} Revision id.
|
||
{7} | {^repository} Repository.
|
||
{8} | {^server} Server.
|
||
{9} | {^repspec} Repository spec.
|
||
{10}| {^datastatus} Availability of the revision data.
|
||
{11}| {^path} Path or spec passed as <item_path>.
|
||
{12}| {^itemid} Item Id.
|
||
{13}| {^size} Size.
|
||
{14}| {^hash} Hash code.
|
||
{^tab} Inserts a tab space.
|
||
{^newline} Inserts a new line.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^history file1.txt "file 2.txt"
|
||
|
||
cm ^hist c:\workspace --^long
|
||
(Displays all information.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^history link --^symlink
|
||
(Applies the history operation to the symlink file and not to the target.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^history ^serverpath:/src/foo/bar.c#^br:/main/task001@myserver
|
||
(Retrieves the revision history from a server path in a given branch.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^history bar.c, foo.c --long --limit=2
|
||
(Retrieves the 2 last revisions for the bar.c and foo.c items.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_REVISION_TREE ==
|
||
Shows the revision tree for an item.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_REVISION_TREE ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^tree <path> [--^symlink]
|
||
|
||
path Item path.
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^symlink Applies the operation to the link file and not to the target.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_REVISION_TREE ==
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^tree fichero1.txt
|
||
cm ^tree c:\workspace
|
||
cm ^tree link --^symlink
|
||
(Applies the operation to the symlink file and not to the target.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_RM ==
|
||
Allows the user to delete files and directories.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_RM ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^remove | ^rm <command> [options]
|
||
|
||
Commands:
|
||
|
||
^controlled (optional)
|
||
^private
|
||
|
||
To get more information about each command run:
|
||
cm ^remove <command> --^usage
|
||
cm ^remove <command> --^help
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_RM ==
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^remove \path\controlled_file.txt
|
||
cm ^remove ^private \path\private_file.txt
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_RM_CONTROLLED ==
|
||
Deletes a file or directory from version control.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_RM_CONTROLLED ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^remove | ^rm <item_path>[ ...] [--^format=<str_format>]
|
||
[--^errorformat=<str_format>] [--^nodisk]
|
||
|
||
item_path Items path to remove. Use double quotes (" ") to specify
|
||
paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to separate
|
||
paths.
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^format Retrieves the output progress message in a specific
|
||
format. See the Examples for more information.
|
||
--^errorformat Retrieves the error message (if any) in a specific
|
||
format. See the Examples for more information.
|
||
--^nodisk Removes from version control, but keeps the item on
|
||
disk.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_RM_CONTROLLED ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
Items are deleted from disk. Removed items are removed from the parent
|
||
directory in the source code control.
|
||
|
||
Requirements:
|
||
- The item must be under source code control.
|
||
|
||
Reading input from stdin:
|
||
|
||
The '^remove' command can read paths from stdin. To do this, pass a single
|
||
dash "-".
|
||
Example: cm ^remove -
|
||
|
||
Paths will be read until an empty line is entered.
|
||
This allows you to use pipe to specify which files to remove.
|
||
Example:
|
||
dir /S /B *.c | cm ^remove -
|
||
(In Windows, removes all .c files in the workspace.)
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^remove src
|
||
(Removes 'src'. If src is a directory, this is the same as
|
||
'cm ^remove -^R src'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^remove c:\workspace\file.txt --^format="{0} - REMOVED" \
|
||
--^errorformat="{0} - ERROR REMOVING"
|
||
(Removes 'file.txt' from version control and from disk, writing
|
||
"c:\workspace\file.txt - ^REMOVED" if the operation succeeded, or
|
||
"c:\workspace\file.txt - ^ERROR ^REMOVING" otherwise.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^remove c:\workspace\file.txt --^nodisk
|
||
(Removes 'file.txt' from version control, but keeps it on disk.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_RM_PRIVATE ==
|
||
Deletes a private file or directory.
|
||
|
||
Warning: files deleted using the command are permanently erased, and are not
|
||
recoverable. It is recommended that you use the '--^dry-run' option to check
|
||
which files will be affected by the command.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_RM_PRIVATE ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^remove | ^rm ^private <path>[ ...] [-^R | -^r | --^recursive] [--^ignored]
|
||
[--^verbose] [--^dry-run]
|
||
|
||
path Path of the files or directories to remove. Use double
|
||
quotes (" ") to specify paths containing spaces. Use a
|
||
whitespace to separate paths.
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^r Recursively deletes private files from within controlled
|
||
directories.
|
||
--^ignored Deletes also ignored and cloaked files and directories.
|
||
--^verbose Prints all affected paths.
|
||
--^dry-run Runs the command without making any changes on disk.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_RM_PRIVATE ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
If the path is a private file or directory, it will be deleted from disk.
|
||
If the path is a controlled file, the command fails.
|
||
If the path is a controlled directory, the command fails unless you
|
||
specify the '-^r' option, in which case it will delete all private files and
|
||
directories below the specified directory.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^remove ^private private_directory
|
||
(Deletes 'private_directory'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^remove ^private c:\workspace\controlled_directory
|
||
(Fails, because 'controlled_directory' is not private.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^remove ^private -^r c:\workspace\controlled_directory
|
||
(Deletes all private files and directories below 'controlled_directory'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^rm ^private --^dry-run --^verbose c:\workspace\controlled_directory -^r
|
||
(Shows all of the paths affected by the deletion of private files below
|
||
'controlled_directory' without actually deleting anything.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^rm ^private --^verbose c:\workspace\controlled_directory -^r
|
||
(Shows all of the paths affected by the deletion of private files below
|
||
'controlled_directory', performing the delete.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_TRIGGER_DELETE ==
|
||
Deletes a trigger.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_TRIGGER_DELETE ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^trigger | ^tr ^delete | ^rm <subtype-type> <position_number>
|
||
[--^server=<repserverspec>]
|
||
|
||
subtype-type Trigger execution and trigger operation.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^showtriggertypes' to see a list of trigger
|
||
types.)
|
||
position_number Position assigned to the trigger when it was created.
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^server Deletes the trigger on the specified server.
|
||
If no server is specified, executes the command on the
|
||
one configured on the client.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_TRIGGER_DELETE ==
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^trigger ^delete ^after-setselector 4
|
||
cm ^tr ^rm ^after-setselector 4
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_ATTRIBUTE_SET ==
|
||
Sets an attribute on a given object.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_ATTRIBUTE_SET ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^attribute | ^att ^set <att_spec> <object_spec> <att_value>
|
||
|
||
att_spec Attribute specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to
|
||
learn more about attribute specs.)
|
||
object_spec Specification of the object to set the attribute on.
|
||
Attributes can be set on: branches, changesets,
|
||
shelvesets, labels, items, and revisions.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
|
||
att_value The attribute value to set to the object.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_ATTRIBUTE_SET ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
An attribute can be set on an object to save additional information for
|
||
this object.
|
||
Attributes can be set on the following objects: branches, changesets,
|
||
shelvesets, labels, items, and revisions.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^attribute ^set ^att:status ^br:/main/SCM105 open
|
||
(Sets attribute 'status' to branch 'SCM105' with value 'open'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^att ^set ^att:integrated@reptest@server2:8084 ^lb:LB008@reptest@server2:8084 yes
|
||
(Sets attribute 'integrated' to label 'LB008' in repository 'reptest' with
|
||
value 'yes'.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_SETOWNER ==
|
||
Sets the owner of an object.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_SETOWNER ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^setowner | ^sto --^user=<usr_name> | --^group=<group> <object_spec>
|
||
|
||
--^user User name. New owner of the object.
|
||
--^group Group name. New owner of the object.
|
||
object_spec Specification of the object to set the new owner on.
|
||
The owner can be set on the following objects:
|
||
repository server, repository, branch, changeset,
|
||
label, item, revision and attribute.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_SETOWNER ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
The owner of an object can be a user or a group.
|
||
|
||
The owner can be set on the following objects: repository server,
|
||
repository, branch, changeset, label, item, revision, and attribute.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^setowner --^user=john ^repserver:localhost:8084
|
||
(Sets 'john' as repository server owner.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^sto --^group=development ^rep:mainRep@PlasticServer:8084
|
||
(Sets 'development' group as owner of 'mainRep' repository.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_SETSELECTOR ==
|
||
Sets the selector to a workspace.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_SETSELECTOR ==
|
||
This command is deprecated. It is still present for backwards compatibility
|
||
but selectors were largely deprecated in Plastic SCM 4.0. Selectors still
|
||
exist to specify the working branch or changeset, but the old rules to
|
||
filter paths are no longer supported.
|
||
|
||
Usage:
|
||
cm ^setselector | ^sts [--^file=<selector_file>] [--^ignorechanges]
|
||
[--^forcedetailedprogress] [<wk_path> | <wk_spec>]
|
||
[--^noinput]
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^file File to load a selector from.
|
||
--^ignorechanges Ignores the pending changes warning message that is
|
||
shown if there are pending changes detected when
|
||
updating the workspace.
|
||
--^forcedetailedprogress Forces detailed progress even when standard output
|
||
is redirected.
|
||
--^noinput Skips the interactive questions to continue the
|
||
operation with pending changes or to shelve them.
|
||
wk_path Path of the workspace to set the selector.
|
||
wk_spec Workspace specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec'
|
||
to learn more about workspace specs.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_SETSELECTOR ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
This command sets the selector of a workspace.
|
||
|
||
A workspace needs information to load revisions from the repository.
|
||
To get this information, Unity VCS uses a selector.
|
||
|
||
Using a selector, it is possible to load revisions from a given branch,
|
||
label, or changeset.
|
||
|
||
If a file to load the selector is not specified, the default Operating
|
||
System editor will be executed.
|
||
|
||
Sample selector:
|
||
|
||
^repository "^default" // working repository
|
||
^path "/" // rules will be applied to the root directory
|
||
^branch "/^main" // obtain latest revisions from ^br:/^main
|
||
^checkout "/^main" // place checkouts on branch ^br:/^main
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^sts
|
||
(Opens the current selector file to be applied.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^sts ^wk:workspace_projA@reptest
|
||
(Opens the specified selector file to be applied.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^setselector --^file=c:\selectors\sel.xml
|
||
(Sets the specified selector file in the current workspace.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^setselector --^file=c:\selectors\sel.xml ^wk:MyWorkspace
|
||
(Sets the specified selector file in the selected workspace.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHELVE ==
|
||
Shelves the contents of checked-out items.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_SHELVE ==
|
||
This command is deprecated. Use 'cm ^shelveset' instead.
|
||
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^shelve [<item_path>+] [--^all] [--^dependencies]
|
||
[-^c=str_comment | -^commentsfile=<comments_file>]
|
||
[--^encoding=name] [--^comparisonmethod=comp_method]
|
||
[--^summaryformat]
|
||
(Shelves the contents.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^shelve --^apply=<sh_spec> [--^mount]
|
||
(Applies a stored shelveset.)
|
||
|
||
--^apply Restores the shelved contents of the specified shelveset.
|
||
Shelve specification: check 'cm ^help ^objectspec'.
|
||
|
||
cm ^shelve --^delete=<sh_spec>
|
||
(Removes a stored shelveset.)
|
||
|
||
--^delete Removes the specified shelveset.
|
||
Shelveset specification: check 'cm ^help ^objectspec'.
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
item_path Items to be shelved, separated by spaces. Quotes (") can
|
||
be used to specify paths containing spaces.
|
||
--^all The items changed, moved and deleted locally, on the
|
||
given paths, will also be included.
|
||
--^dependencies Includes local change dependencies in the items to
|
||
shelve.
|
||
-^c Applies the specified comment to the created shelveset.
|
||
-^commentsfile Applies the comment in the specified file to the created
|
||
shelveset.
|
||
--^encoding Specifies the output encoding, i.e.: utf-8.
|
||
See the MSDN documentation at
|
||
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
|
||
to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
|
||
(at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
|
||
--^comparisonmethod Sets the comparison method. See remarks for more info.
|
||
|
||
--^summaryformat Just prints the shelveset spec created for the main repo,
|
||
skipping shelvesets of xlinked repos and any other output
|
||
messages. For automation purposes.
|
||
|
||
--^mount The mount point for the given repository.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_SHELVE ==
|
||
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
If neither <item_path> nor any option is specified, the shelve will involve
|
||
all the pending changes in the workspace.
|
||
|
||
The shelve operation is always applied recursively from the given path.
|
||
|
||
Requirements to shelve an item:
|
||
- The item must be under source code control.
|
||
- The item must be checked out or changed (--^all option must be used).
|
||
|
||
Comparison methods:
|
||
^ignoreeol Ignores end of line differences.
|
||
^ignorewhitespaces Ignores whitespace differences.
|
||
^ignoreeolandwhitespaces Ignores end of line and whitespace differences.
|
||
^recognizeall Detects end of line and whitespace differences.
|
||
|
||
Set the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable to specify an editor for
|
||
entering comments. If the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable is set, and
|
||
the comment is empty, the editor will be automatically launched to allow
|
||
you to specify the comment.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^shelve -^c="my comment"
|
||
(Shelves all the pending changes in the current workspace including a
|
||
comment.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^shelve file1.txt "file 2.txt" -^commentsfile=commentshelve.txt
|
||
(Shelves the selected pending changes and applies the comment in the
|
||
commentshelve.txt file.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^shelve --^apply=^sh:3
|
||
(Applies a stored shelveset.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^shelve --^delete=^sh:3
|
||
(Removes a stored shelveset.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^status --^short --^changelist=pending_to_review | cm ^shelve -
|
||
(Shelves client changelist.
|
||
The command above lists the paths in the changelist named
|
||
'pending_to_review' and the path list is redirected to the input of the
|
||
shelve command.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHELVESET ==
|
||
Allows the user to manage shelvesets.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_SHELVESET ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^shelveset <command> [options]
|
||
|
||
Commands:
|
||
|
||
^create | ^mk
|
||
^delete | ^rm
|
||
^apply
|
||
|
||
To get more information about each command run:
|
||
cm ^shelveset <command> --^usage
|
||
cm ^shelveset <command> --^help
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_SHELVESET ==
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^shelveset ^create -^c="my comment"
|
||
cm ^shelveset ^delete ^sh:3
|
||
cm ^shelve ^apply ^sh:3
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHELVESET_CREATE ==
|
||
Shelves pending changes.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_SHELVESET_CREATE ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^shelveset ^create | ^mk [<item_path>[ ...]] [--^all] [--^dependencies]
|
||
[-^c=<str_comment> | -^commentsfile=<comments_file>]
|
||
[--^summaryformat]
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
item_path Items to shelve. Use a whitespace to separate user names.
|
||
Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths containing
|
||
spaces.
|
||
--^all The items changed, moved, and deleted locally, on the
|
||
given paths, will also be included.
|
||
--^dependencies Includes local change dependencies into the items to
|
||
shelve.
|
||
--^summaryformat Just prints the shelveset spec created for the main repo,
|
||
skipping shelvesets of xlinked repos and any other output
|
||
messages. For automation purposes.
|
||
-^c Applies the specified comment to the created shelve.
|
||
-^commentsfile Applies the comment in the specified file to the created
|
||
shelve.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_SHELVESET_CREATE ==
|
||
The '^shelveset ^create' command stores the contents of checked out items inside the
|
||
repository. This way the contents are protected without the need to
|
||
checkin the files.
|
||
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
If neither <item_path> nor any option is specified, the shelveset will
|
||
include all the pending changes in the workspace.
|
||
|
||
The '^shelveset ^create' operation is always applied recursively from the
|
||
given path.
|
||
|
||
Requirements to shelve an item:
|
||
- The item must be under source code control.
|
||
- The item must be checked out or changed ('--^all' option must be used).
|
||
|
||
Set the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable to specify an editor for
|
||
entering comments. If the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable is set, and
|
||
the comment is empty, the editor will be automatically launched to allow
|
||
you to specify the comment.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^shelveset ^create -^c="my comment"
|
||
(Shelves all the pending changes in the current workspace including a
|
||
comment.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^shelveset file1.txt "file 2.txt" -^commentsfile=commentshelve.txt
|
||
(Shelves the selected pending changes and applies the comment in the
|
||
'commentshelve.txt' file. Note, '^create' is the default subcommand.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^status --^short --^changelist=pending_to_review | cm ^shelveset -
|
||
(Shelves client changelist.
|
||
The command above lists the paths in the changelist named
|
||
'pending_to_review' and the path list is redirected to the input of the
|
||
'^shelveset' command.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHELVESET_DELETE ==
|
||
Deletes a shelveset.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_SHELVESET_DELETE ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^shelveset ^delete | ^rm <sh_spec>
|
||
|
||
sh_spec Shelveset specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to
|
||
learn more about shelveset specs.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_SHELVESET_DELETE ==
|
||
The '^shelveset ^delete' command deletes a shelveset.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^shelveset ^delete ^sh:3
|
||
(Removes a stored shelveset.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHELVESET_APPLY ==
|
||
Applies a stored shelveset.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_SHELVESET_APPLY ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^shelveset ^apply <sh_spec> [<change_path>[ ...]] [--^preview]
|
||
[--^mount] [--^encoding=<name>]
|
||
[--^comparisonmethod=(^ignoreeol | ^ignorewhitespaces| \
|
||
^ignoreeolandwhitespaces | ^recognizeall)]
|
||
|
||
sh_spec Shelveset specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to
|
||
learn more about shelveset specs.)
|
||
change_path The change path(s) of the shelve to apply. It's a
|
||
server path, the one printed by the --preview option.
|
||
When no path is set, all changes will be applied.
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^preview Prints the changes to apply on the workspace without
|
||
applying them
|
||
--^mount The mount point for the given repository.
|
||
--^encoding Specifies the output encoding, i.e.: utf-8.
|
||
See the MSDN documentation at
|
||
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
|
||
to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
|
||
(at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
|
||
--^comparisonmethod Sets the comparison method. See Remarks for more info.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_SHELVESET_APPLY ==
|
||
The '^shelveset ^apply' command restores the contents of a stored shelveset.
|
||
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
Comparison methods:
|
||
^ignoreeol Ignores end of line differences.
|
||
^ignorewhitespaces Ignores whitespace differences.
|
||
^ignoreeolandwhitespaces Ignores end of line and whitespace differences.
|
||
^recognizeall Detects end of line and whitespace differences.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^shelveset ^apply ^sh:3
|
||
(Applies a stored shelve.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^shelveset ^apply ^sh:3 /src/foo.c
|
||
(Applies only the /src/foo.c change stored on the shelve.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHOW_FIND_OBJECTS ==
|
||
Lists objects and attributes.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_SHOW_FIND_OBJECTS ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^showfindobjects
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_SHOW_FIND_OBJECTS ==
|
||
Available objects and attributes:
|
||
|
||
^attribute:
|
||
You can find attributes by filtering using the following fields:
|
||
|
||
^type : string.
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^attribute "^where ^type = 'status'"
|
||
(Finds all attributes of type 'status'.)
|
||
|
||
^value : string.
|
||
^date : date.
|
||
Check "date constants" for more info in this guide.
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^attribute "^where ^date > '^this ^week'"
|
||
(Finds all attributes applied during the current week.)
|
||
|
||
^owner : user.
|
||
Admits special user '^me'.
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^attribute "^where ^value = 'resolved' ^and ^owner = '^me'"
|
||
(Finds all attributes with value 'resolved' applied by me.)
|
||
|
||
^GUID : Global Unique Identifier.
|
||
Hexadecimal id in the format xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx.
|
||
^comment : string.
|
||
^srcobj : object spec: item path, branch, changeset, revision, or label.
|
||
Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to specify these objects.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
cm ^find ^attribute "^where ^srcobj = '^item:readme.txt'"
|
||
(Finds the attributes applied to the item 'readme.txt'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^find ^attribute "^where ^srcobj = '^br:/main/scm23343'"
|
||
(Finds the attributes applied to the branch scm23343.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^find ^attribute "^where ^srcobj = '^rev:readme.txt#^br:/main/task002'"
|
||
(Finds the attributes applied to the specified revision.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^find ^attribute "^where ^srcobj = '^rev:^revid:1126'"
|
||
(Finds the attributes applied to the specified revision id.)
|
||
|
||
^ID : integer.
|
||
|
||
^attributetype:
|
||
You can find attribute types by filtering using the following fields:
|
||
|
||
^name : string.
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^attributetype "^where ^name ^like 'st%'"
|
||
(Finds all attribute where name starts with 'st'.)
|
||
|
||
^value : string.
|
||
^date : date.
|
||
Check "date constants" for more info in this guide.
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^attribute "^where ^date > '^today'"
|
||
(Finds all attributes applied today.)
|
||
|
||
^owner : user.
|
||
Admits special user '^me'.
|
||
^GUID : Global Unique Identifier.
|
||
Hexadecimal id in the format xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx.
|
||
^comment : string.
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^attributetype "^where ^comment != ''" --^xml
|
||
(Finds all attribute types that have a comment and prints the
|
||
output in XML format to the standard output.)
|
||
|
||
^source : object spec: item path, branch, changeset or label.
|
||
Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to specify these objects.
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
|
||
cm ^find ^attributetype "^where ^source = '^item:readme.txt'"
|
||
(Finds all attribute types in item 'readme.txt'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^find ^attributetype "^where ^source = '^cs:30'"
|
||
(Finds all attribute types in changeset '30'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^find ^attributetype "^where ^source = '^lb:v0.14.1'"
|
||
(Finds all attribute types in label 'v0.14.1'.)
|
||
|
||
^ID : integer.
|
||
|
||
Replication field. Check "replication related fields" below.
|
||
^ReplLogId
|
||
^ReplSrcDate
|
||
^ReplSrcId
|
||
^ReplSrcRepository
|
||
^ReplSrcServer
|
||
|
||
^branch:
|
||
You can find branches by filtering using the following fields:
|
||
|
||
^name : string.
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^branch "^where ^name ^like 'scm23%'"
|
||
(Finds branches which name starts with 'scm23'.)
|
||
|
||
^date : date.
|
||
Check "date constants" for more info in this guide.
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^branch "^where ^date > '^one ^week ^ago'"
|
||
(Finds branches created during the last week.)
|
||
|
||
^changesets : date (of the changesets in the branch).
|
||
Check "date constants" for more info in this guide.
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^branch "^where ^changesets >= '^today'"
|
||
(Finds branches with changesets created today.)
|
||
|
||
^attribute : string.
|
||
^attrvalue : string.
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^branch "^where ^attribute = 'status' ^and ^attrvalue = 'failed'"
|
||
(Finds branches that have the attribute 'status' and which
|
||
value is 'failed'.)
|
||
|
||
^owner : user.
|
||
Admits special user '^me'.
|
||
^parent : branch spec.
|
||
Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to specify this object.
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^branch "^where ^owner != '^me' ^and ^parent != '^br:/main'"
|
||
(Finds branches created by other than me and which parent
|
||
branch is not '/main'.)
|
||
|
||
^comment : string.
|
||
^GUID : Global Unique Identifier.
|
||
Hexadecimal id in the format xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx.
|
||
|
||
^ID : integer.
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^branch "^where ^id = 2029607"
|
||
(Finds the branch which id is 2029607.)
|
||
|
||
You can use the '^order ^by' clause with this object. Specifically, you can short
|
||
by using the following fields:
|
||
^date
|
||
^branchname
|
||
|
||
Replication fields. Check "replication related fields" below.
|
||
^ReplLogId
|
||
^ReplSrcDate
|
||
^ReplSrcId
|
||
^ReplSrcRepository
|
||
^ReplSrcServer
|
||
|
||
^changeset:
|
||
You can find changesets by filtering using the following fields:
|
||
|
||
^branch : branch spec.
|
||
Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to specify this
|
||
object.
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^changeset "^where ^branch = '/main/scm23119'"
|
||
(Finds all changesets in branch 'scm23119'.)
|
||
|
||
^changesetid : integer.
|
||
^attribute : string.
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^changeset "^where ^attribute = 'status'"
|
||
(Finds the changesets with the attribute 'status'.)
|
||
|
||
^attrvalue : string.
|
||
^date : date.
|
||
Check "date constants" for more info in this guide.
|
||
^owner : user.
|
||
Admits special user '^me'.
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^changeset "^where ^date >= '6/8/2018' ^and ^owner != '^me'"
|
||
(Finds all changesets with creation date equal or
|
||
greater than 6/8/2018 and created by others than me.)
|
||
|
||
^GUID : Global Unique Identifier.
|
||
Hexadecimal id in the format xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx.
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^changeset "^where ^guid = '1b30674f-14cc-4fd7-962b-676c8a6f5cb6'"
|
||
(Finds the changeset with the specified guid.)
|
||
|
||
^comment : string.
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^changeset "^where ^comment = ''"
|
||
(Finds the changesets with no comments.)
|
||
|
||
^onlywithrevisions : boolean.
|
||
To filter whether a cset has revisions or not.
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^changeset "^where ^onlywithrevisions = 'false'"
|
||
(Finds changesets with no revisions.)
|
||
|
||
^returnparent : boolean.
|
||
A way to return the parent of a cset. Good for scripting.
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^changeset "^where ^changesetid = 29 ^and ^returnparent = 'true'"
|
||
(Finds the parent of changeset 29.)
|
||
|
||
^parent : changeset id (integer).
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^changeset "^where ^parent = 548"
|
||
(Finds all changesets which parent is cset 548.)
|
||
|
||
^ID : integer.
|
||
|
||
You can use the '^order ^by' clause with this object. Specifically, you can sort
|
||
by using the following fields:
|
||
^date
|
||
^changesetid
|
||
|
||
Replication fields. Check "replication related fields" below.
|
||
^ReplLogId
|
||
^ReplSrcDate
|
||
^ReplSrcId
|
||
^ReplSrcRepository
|
||
^ReplSrcServer
|
||
|
||
^label:
|
||
You can find labels by filtering using the following fields:
|
||
|
||
^name : string.
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^label "^where ^name ^like '7.0.16.%'"
|
||
(Finds the labels with a name that starts with '7.0.16.'.)
|
||
|
||
^attribute : string.
|
||
^attrvalue : string.
|
||
^date : date.
|
||
Check "date constants" for more info in this guide.
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^label "^where ^date >= '^this ^month' ^and \
|
||
^attribute = 'publish-status' ^and ^attrvalue != 'PUBLISHED'"
|
||
(Finds the labels created this month with an attribute 'publish-status'
|
||
set to a value other than 'PUBLISHED'.)
|
||
|
||
^owner : user.
|
||
Admits special user '^me'.
|
||
^GUID : Global Unique Identifier.
|
||
Hexadecimal id in the format xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx.
|
||
^branch : branch spec.
|
||
Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to specify this object.
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^label "^where ^branch = '/main'"
|
||
(Finds all labels applied to the main branch.)
|
||
|
||
^branchid : integer.
|
||
^changeset : changeset id (integer).
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^label "^where ^changeset = 111733"
|
||
(Finds the labels applied to changeset 111733.)
|
||
|
||
^comment : string.
|
||
^ID : integer.
|
||
|
||
You can use the '^order ^by' clause with this object. Specifically, you can sort
|
||
by using the following fields:
|
||
^date
|
||
^labelname
|
||
|
||
Replication fields. Check "replication related fields" below.
|
||
^ReplLogId
|
||
^ReplSrcDate
|
||
^ReplSrcId
|
||
^ReplSrcRepository
|
||
^ReplSrcServer
|
||
|
||
^merge:
|
||
You can find merges by filtering using the following fields:
|
||
|
||
^srcbranch : branch spec.
|
||
Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to specify this object.
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^merge "^where ^srcbranch = '^br:/main'"
|
||
(Finds merges from the main branch.)
|
||
|
||
^srcchangeset : changeset id (integer).
|
||
^dstbranch : branch spec.
|
||
Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to specify this object.
|
||
^dstchangeset : changeset id (integer).
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^merge "^where ^dstchangeset = 108261" \
|
||
--^format="{^srcbranch} {^srcchangeset} {^dstbranch} {^dstchangeset} {^owner}"
|
||
(Finds the merges to changeset 108261 and prints the
|
||
formatted output showing the source (branch and cset id),
|
||
the destination (branch and cset id), and the merge owner.)
|
||
|
||
^date : date.
|
||
Check "date constants" for more info in this guide.
|
||
^owner : user.
|
||
Admits special user '^me'.
|
||
^GUID : Global Unique Identifier.
|
||
Hexadecimal id in the format xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx.
|
||
^type : string.
|
||
Possible values are '^merge', '^cherrypick',
|
||
'^cherrypicksubstractive', '^interval', '^intervalcherrypick'
|
||
and '^intervalcherrypicksubstractive'
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^merge "^where ^type = '^cherrypick' ^and ^owner = '^me'"
|
||
(Finds all my cherry picks.)
|
||
|
||
^ID : integer.
|
||
|
||
^replicationlog:
|
||
You can find replication log by filtering using the following fields:
|
||
|
||
^branch : branch spec.
|
||
Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to specify this object.
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^replicationlog "^where ^branch = '/main/gm22358'"
|
||
(Finds the replication logs of branch 'gm22358'.)
|
||
|
||
^repositoryname : string.
|
||
^owner : user.
|
||
Admits special user '^me'.
|
||
^date : date.
|
||
Check "date constants" for more info in this guide.
|
||
^server : string.
|
||
^package : boolean.
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^replicationlog "^where ^package = 'T' ^and ^server ^like '%cloud%'"
|
||
(Finds the replication logs created from package which
|
||
server name contains 'cloud'.)
|
||
|
||
^ID : integer.
|
||
|
||
^review:
|
||
You can find code reviews by filtering using the following fields:
|
||
|
||
^status : string.
|
||
^assignee : string.
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^review "^where ^status = 'pending' ^and ^assignee = '^me'"
|
||
(Finds all my pending reviews.)
|
||
|
||
^title : string.
|
||
^target : object spec: branch or changeset.
|
||
Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to specify this object.
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^review "^where ^target = '^br:/main/scm17932'"
|
||
(Finds the reviews related to branch 'scm17932'.)
|
||
|
||
^targetid : integer.
|
||
^targettype : string.
|
||
Possible values are '^branch' and '^changeset'.
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^review "^where ^targettype = '^changeset'"
|
||
(Finds the reviews which target type is changeset.)
|
||
|
||
^date : date.
|
||
Check "date constants" for more info in this guide.
|
||
^owner : user.
|
||
Admits special user '^me'.
|
||
^GUID : Global Unique Identifier.
|
||
Hexadecimal id in the format xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx.
|
||
^ID : integer.
|
||
|
||
You can use the '^order ^by' clause with this object. Specifically, you can sort
|
||
by using the following fields:
|
||
^date
|
||
^modifieddate
|
||
^status
|
||
|
||
^revision:
|
||
You can find revisions by filtering using the following fields:
|
||
|
||
^branch : branch spec.
|
||
Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to specify this object.
|
||
^changeset : changeset id (integer).
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^revision "^where ^changeset >= 111756"
|
||
(Finds the revisions created in changeset 111756
|
||
and later.)
|
||
|
||
^item : string or integer.
|
||
^itemid : integer.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
cm ^find ^revision "^where ^item = 'readme.txt' ^or ^itemid = 2250"
|
||
(Finds the revisions of item 'readme.txt' plus
|
||
item id 2250.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^find ^revision "^where ^item = 'readme.txt' ^or ^item = 2250"
|
||
(Gets the same revisions as the previous example.)
|
||
|
||
^attribute : string.
|
||
^attrvalue : string.
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^revision "^where ^attribute = 'status' ^and ^attrvalue != 'open'"
|
||
(Finds the revisions with attribute 'status' which
|
||
value is other than 'open'.)
|
||
|
||
^archived : boolean.
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^revision "^where ^archived = 'true'"
|
||
(Finds the revisions that are archived in an
|
||
external storage.)
|
||
|
||
^comment : string.
|
||
^date : date.
|
||
Check "date constants" for more info in this guide.
|
||
^GUID : Global Unique Identifier.
|
||
Hexadecimal id in the format xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx.
|
||
^owner : user.
|
||
Admits special user '^me'.
|
||
^parent : revision id (integer).
|
||
^returnparent : boolean.
|
||
^shelve : shelve id (integer).
|
||
^size : integer (in bytes).
|
||
^type : string.
|
||
Possible values are '^dir', '^bin', and '^txt'.
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^revision "^where ^type = '^txt' and \
|
||
^size > 300000 ^and ^owner = '^me' and ^date >= '2 ^months ^ago'"
|
||
(Finds the text revisions created by me two months
|
||
ago and with size greater than about 3MB.)
|
||
|
||
^workspacecheckoutid : integer.
|
||
^ID : integer.
|
||
|
||
Replication fields. Check "replication related fields" below.
|
||
^ReplLogId
|
||
^ReplSrcDate
|
||
^ReplSrcId
|
||
^ReplSrcRepository
|
||
^ReplSrcServer
|
||
|
||
^shelve:
|
||
You can find shelves by filtering using the following fields:
|
||
|
||
^owner : user.
|
||
Admits special user '^me'.
|
||
^date : date.
|
||
Check "date constants" for more info in this guide.
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^shelve "^where ^owner != '^me' ^and ^date >= '^1 ^years ^ago'"
|
||
(Finds the shelves created by others than me during the last
|
||
year.)
|
||
|
||
^attribute : string.
|
||
^attrvalue : string.
|
||
^comment : string.
|
||
^GUID : Global Unique Identifier.
|
||
Hexadecimal id in the format xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx.
|
||
^parent : integer.
|
||
^shelveid : integer.
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^shelve "^where ^shelveid = 2"
|
||
(Finds the shelve with name 2.)
|
||
|
||
^ID : integer.
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^shelve "^where ^id >= 3848"
|
||
(Finds the shelves which object id is greater than 3848.)
|
||
|
||
Replication fields. Check "replication related fields" below.
|
||
^ReplLogId
|
||
^ReplSrcDate
|
||
^ReplSrcId
|
||
^ReplSrcRepository
|
||
^ReplSrcServer
|
||
|
||
|
||
Replication related fields:
|
||
Many objects track replication data, meaning Unity VCS tracks where they were
|
||
originally created.
|
||
|
||
The fields you can use are:
|
||
|
||
^ReplSrcServer : repspec. Stands for "replication source server".
|
||
Server where the object was replicated from.
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^branch "^where ^replsrcserver='skull.codicefactory.com:9095'"
|
||
(Finds the branches replicated from server 'skull'.)
|
||
|
||
^ReplSrcRepository : string. Stands for "replication source repo". It is
|
||
the repository where the object was replicated from.
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^branch "^where ^replsrcserver = 'skull.codicefactory.com:9095' \
|
||
^and ^replsrcrepository = 'codice'"
|
||
(Finds the branches replicated from server 'skull'
|
||
and from repository 'codice'.)
|
||
|
||
^ReplLogId : integer. ID of the replication operation. In Unity VCS,
|
||
each time new objects are created from a replica,
|
||
a new 'replicationlog' is created.
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^revision "^where ^repllogid = 2019974"
|
||
(Finds the revisions replicated from replica
|
||
2019974.)
|
||
|
||
^ReplSrcDate : date. It is the date when the replica actually took
|
||
place.
|
||
Replicated objects will retain its original creation
|
||
date, o this field is useful if you want to find
|
||
objects that where replicated within a specific
|
||
timeframe.
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^label "^where ^replsrcdate >= '^one ^month ^ago' \
|
||
^and ^date >= '15 ^days ^ago'"
|
||
(Finds the labels created 15 days ago and were
|
||
replicated one month ago.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^find ^replicationlog "^where ^date > '^one ^week ^ago'"
|
||
8780433 27/09/2018 8:49:38 codice@BACKYARD:8087 F mbarriosc
|
||
(Finds the replication logs created one week ago.)
|
||
|
||
Now, you can check that the replicated branch was
|
||
created before it was replicated over:
|
||
|
||
cm ^find ^branch "^where ^repllogid = 8780433"
|
||
8780443 26/09/2018 12:20:55 /main/scm23078 maria codice T
|
||
|
||
^ReplSrcId : integer. It is the ID of the replication source server.
|
||
You can discover this ID searching for
|
||
'^replicationsource' objects with the 'cm ^find' command.
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
cm ^find ^replicationsource
|
||
7860739 codice@AFRODITA:8087 d9c4372a-dc55-4fdc-ad3d-baeb2e975f27
|
||
8175854 codice@BACKYARD:8087 66700d3a-036b-4b9a-a26f-adfc336b14f9
|
||
|
||
Now, you can find the changesets replicated from
|
||
codice@AFRODITA:8087:
|
||
|
||
cm ^find ^changesets "^where ^replsrcid = 7860739"
|
||
|
||
|
||
Date constants:
|
||
You can use date formats that follow your machine localization settings.
|
||
For example, if your computer displays dates in the format 'MM-dd-yyyy',
|
||
you can use dates such as '12-31-2019' in your queries.
|
||
|
||
You can also use the following constants to simplify your queries:
|
||
'^today' : today's date.
|
||
'^yesterday' : yesterday's date.
|
||
'^this ^week' : current week's Monday date.
|
||
'^this ^month' : current month's 1st day date.
|
||
'^this ^year' : current year's January 1st date.
|
||
'^one ^day ^ago' : one day before the current date.
|
||
'^one ^week ^ago' : seven days before the current date.
|
||
'^one ^month ^ago' : one month before the current date.
|
||
'n ^days ^ago' : 'n' days before the current date.
|
||
'n ^months ^ago' : 'n' months before the current date.
|
||
'n ^years ^ago' : 'n' years before the current date.
|
||
|
||
The following '^where' clauses are valid for fields of type '^date':
|
||
'(...) ^where ^date > '^today' (...)'
|
||
'(...) ^where ^date < '^yesterday' (...)'
|
||
'(...) ^where ^date > '^this ^week' (...)'
|
||
'(...) ^where ^date > '^this ^month' (...)'
|
||
'(...) ^where ^date < '^one ^day ^ago' ^and ^date > '3 ^days ^ago' (...)'
|
||
'(...) ^where ^date < '^one ^week ^ago' ^and ^date > '3 ^weeks ^ago' (...)'
|
||
'(...) ^where ^date < '^one ^month ^ago' ^and ^date > '3 ^months ^ago' (...)'
|
||
'(...) ^where ^date > '1 ^year ^ago' (...)'
|
||
|
||
You can also force a specific date format on the 'cm ^find' command using the
|
||
--^dateformat flag. Check 'cm ^find --^help' for further details.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_TRIGGER_SHOWTYPES ==
|
||
Displays available trigger types.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_TRIGGER_SHOWTYPES ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^trigger ^showtypes
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_TRIGGER_SHOWTYPES ==
|
||
Displays the list of available trigger types.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^trigger ^showtypes
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHOWACL ==
|
||
Shows the ACL of an object.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_SHOWACL ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^showacl | ^sa <object_spec> [--^extended] [--^xml[=<output_file>]]
|
||
[--^encoding=<name>]
|
||
|
||
object_spec Specification of the object to show the ACL of.
|
||
The valid objects for this command are:
|
||
repserver, repository, branch, changeset, label, item,
|
||
and attribute.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^extended Shows ACL hierarchy tree.
|
||
--^xml Prints the output in XML format to the standard output.
|
||
It is possible to specify an output file.
|
||
--^encoding Used with the '--^xml' option, specifies the encoding to
|
||
use in the XML output, i.e.: utf-8.
|
||
See the MSDN documentation at
|
||
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
|
||
to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
|
||
(at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_SHOWACL ==
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^showacl ^repserver:PlasticServer:8084
|
||
(Shows the ACL of the selected server.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^sa ^br:/main --^extended
|
||
(Shows the ACL hierarchy tree of the selected branch specification.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHOWCOMMANDS ==
|
||
Shows all the available commands.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_SHOWCOMMANDS ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^showcommands
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_SHOWCOMMANDS ==
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHOWOWNER ==
|
||
Shows the owner of an object.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_SHOWOWNER ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^showowner | ^so <object_spec>
|
||
|
||
object_spec Specification of the object to show the owner of.
|
||
The object must be one of the following:
|
||
repository server, repository, branch, changeset,
|
||
label, attribute, revision, and item.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_SHOWOWNER ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
This command displays the owner of an object. The owner can be a user or
|
||
a group. The owner can be modified with 'cm ^setowner' command.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^showowner ^repserver:PlasticServer:8084
|
||
(Shows the owner of the selected server.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^so ^item:samples\
|
||
(Shows the owner of the selected item specification.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHOWPERMISSIONS ==
|
||
Lists the available permissions.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_SHOWPERMISSIONS ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^showpermissions | ^sp
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_SHOWPERMISSIONS ==
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^showpermissions
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHOWSELECTOR ==
|
||
Shows the workspace selector.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_SHOWSELECTOR ==
|
||
This command is deprecated. It is still present for backwards compatibility
|
||
but selectors were largely deprecated in Plastic SCM 4.0. Selectors still
|
||
exist to specify the working branch or changeset, but the old rules to
|
||
filter paths are no longer supported.
|
||
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^showselector | ^ss [<wk_path> | <wk_spec>]
|
||
|
||
wk_path Path of the workspace to show the selector.
|
||
wk_spec Workspace specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to
|
||
learn more about workspace specs.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_SHOWSELECTOR ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
If neither path nor workspace spec is specified, the command will take the
|
||
current directory as the workspace path.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^showselector c:\workspace
|
||
(Shows the selector for the selected workspace path.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^ss
|
||
(Shows the selector for current workspace.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^showselector > mySelector.txt
|
||
(Writes into a file the selector for the current workspace.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^showselector ^wk:mywk@reptest
|
||
(Shows the selector for the workspace 'mywk' in the repository 'reptest'.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_SUPPORT ==
|
||
Allows the user to perform support related operations.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_SUPPORT ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^support <command> [options]
|
||
|
||
Commands:
|
||
|
||
^bundle
|
||
|
||
To get more information about each command run:
|
||
cm ^support <command> --^usage
|
||
cm ^support <command> --^help
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_SUPPORT ==
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^support
|
||
cm ^support ^bundle
|
||
cm ^support ^bundle c:\outputfile.zip
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_SUPPORT_BUNDLE ==
|
||
Creates a "support bundle" package with relevant logs.
|
||
You can attach the file while requesting help, asking for extra info, or
|
||
submitting a bug.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_SUPPORT_BUNDLE ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^support ^bundle [<outputfile>]
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
outputfile Creates the "support bundle" package at the specified
|
||
location.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_SUPPORT_BUNDLE ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
This command allows users to create a "support bundle" package which can be
|
||
attached when requesting help, asking for extra info, or submitting a bug.
|
||
The user can optionally specify a location for the output file; otherwise, the
|
||
output file will be written to the temp directory.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^support ^bundle
|
||
(Creates "support bundle" in temp directory.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^support ^bundle c:\outputfile.zip
|
||
(Creates "support bundle" at the specified location.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_SWITCH ==
|
||
Switches the workspace to a branch, changeset, label, or shelveset.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_SWITCH ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^switch (<brspec> | <csetspec> | <lbspec> | <shspec>)
|
||
[--^workspace=<path>] [--^repository=<name>]
|
||
[--^forcedetailedprogress]
|
||
[--^silent] [--^verbose] [--^xml[=<output_file>]] [--^encoding=<name>]
|
||
[--^forcedetailedprogress] [--^noinput]
|
||
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about branch, changeset, label,
|
||
and shelveset specifications.)
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^workspace Path where the workspace is located.
|
||
--^repository Switches to the specified repository.
|
||
--^forcedetailedprogress Forces detailed progress even when standard
|
||
output is redirected.
|
||
--^noinput Skips the interactive questions to continue the
|
||
operation with pending changes or to shelve them.
|
||
--^silent No output is shown unless an error happens.
|
||
--^verbose Shows additional information.
|
||
--^xml Prints the output in XML format to the standard output.
|
||
It is possible to specify an output file.
|
||
--^encoding Used with the --^xml option, specifies the encoding to
|
||
use in the XML output, i.e.: utf-8.
|
||
See the MSDN documentation at
|
||
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
|
||
to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
|
||
(at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_SWITCH ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
This command allows users to update the workspace tree to the contents
|
||
of the specified object (branch, label, shelveset, or changeset).
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^switch ^br:/main
|
||
cm ^switch ^lb:Rel1.1
|
||
cm ^switch ^br:/main/scm002 --^repository=rep2
|
||
cm ^switch ^cs:4375
|
||
cm ^switch ^sh:2
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_SWITCH_TO_BRANCH ==
|
||
Sets a branch as the working branch.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_SWITCH_TO_BRANCH ==
|
||
This command is deprecated. Use cm switch instead.
|
||
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^switchtobranch [options] [branch_spec]
|
||
|
||
branch_spec: Branch specification.
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^label=name | --^changeset=number: load revisions from the specified
|
||
label or changeset. One of these options is required if no branch_spec is
|
||
given.
|
||
--^changeset=cset: Switch to the specified changeset.
|
||
--^repository=rep: Switch to the specified repository.
|
||
--^workspace | -wk=path: path where the workspace is located.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_SWITCH_TO_BRANCH ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
This command allows users to work in a branch.
|
||
If no branch_spec specified, a label or a changeset must be specified.
|
||
If no repository is specified, the branch is set to the current repository.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^switchtobranch ^br:/main
|
||
cm ^switchtobranch ^br:/main/task001
|
||
|
||
cm ^switchtobranch --^label=BL050
|
||
(Read-only configuration. The command loads the contents of the labeled
|
||
changeset.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_SYNC ==
|
||
Synchronize with Git.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_SYNC ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^synchronize | ^sync <repspec> ^git [<url> [--^user=<usr_name> --^pwd=<pwd>]]
|
||
[(--^txtsimilaritypercent | --^binsimilaritypercent | \
|
||
--^dirsimilaritypercent)=<value>]
|
||
[--^author] [--^skipgitlfs] [--^gitpushchunk=<value>]
|
||
|
||
|
||
repspec Repository specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' t
|
||
learn more about repository specs.)
|
||
git (Default).
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
url Remote repository URL (http(s):// or git:// or a
|
||
SSH URL).
|
||
--^user User name for the specified URL.
|
||
--^pwd Password for the specified URL.
|
||
--^txtsimilaritypercent \
|
||
--^binsimilaritypercent \
|
||
--^dirsimilaritypercent
|
||
To detect moved items, the same way as the Unity VCS
|
||
GUI does.
|
||
--^author Uses name and timestamp values from the git author.
|
||
(git committer by default)
|
||
--^skipgitlfs Ignores the Git LFS configuration in the
|
||
.gitattributes file. It acts like without Git LFS
|
||
support.
|
||
--^gitpushchunk Process the push operation (exporting changes from
|
||
Unity VCS to Git) in chunks of a certain number of
|
||
changesets. This is only useful for huge repos to
|
||
avoid network or package size related issues or
|
||
just for debugging purposes. It uses chunks of
|
||
1000 changesets if no value is specified.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_SYNC ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
If the git repository requires user and password, then use '^url', '--^user',
|
||
and '--^pwd' options.
|
||
If the git repository doesn't require user and password, then use '^url'
|
||
option with the first sync operation. With next sync operations, '^url'
|
||
option is optional.
|
||
|
||
To use the SSH protocol to perform the sync, you must have the 'ssh' client
|
||
added to the PATH environment variable and properly configured to connect
|
||
to the remote host (i.e. private/public keys configured).
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^sync default@localhost:8087 ^git git://localhost/repository
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_TRIGGER ==
|
||
Allows the user to manage triggers.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_TRIGGER ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^trigger | ^tr <command> [options]
|
||
|
||
Commands:
|
||
|
||
^create | ^mk
|
||
^delete | ^rm
|
||
^edit
|
||
^list | ^ls
|
||
^showtypes
|
||
|
||
To get more information about each command run:
|
||
cm ^trigger <command> --^usage
|
||
cm ^trigger <command> --^help
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_TRIGGER ==
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^tr ^mk ^before-mklabel new "/path/to/script" --^server=myserver:8084
|
||
cm ^tr ^edit ^before-mklabel 7 --^position=4 --^server=myserver:8084
|
||
cm ^tr ^ls ^before-mkbranch --^server=myserver:8084
|
||
cm ^tr ^rm ^after-setselector 4
|
||
cm ^tr ^showtypes
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_TUBE ==
|
||
Runs commands related to Plastic Tube.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_TUBE ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^tube ^config -^u=<user> -^p=<password>
|
||
(Configures Unity VCS to use Plastic Tube with the specified user and
|
||
password.)
|
||
|
||
|
||
cm ^tube ^create <remoteuser>
|
||
(Creates the tube "remoteuser -> myuser".
|
||
The user "myuser" allows to "remoteuser" to connect to "myuser" server.
|
||
Connections can be established from "remoteuser" to "myuser".
|
||
Only tubes from other users to the current tube user can be created.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^tube ^remove <remoteuser>
|
||
(Removes the tube "remoteuser -> myuser".)
|
||
|
||
|
||
cm ^tube ^local
|
||
(Lists the local repositories shared in the local server and the users
|
||
that it is shared with.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^tube ^remote
|
||
(Lists the shared remote repositories that are shared with the current
|
||
tube user.)
|
||
|
||
|
||
cm ^tube ^share <rep_spec>[ ...] -^u=<remoteuser> -^a=(^pull | ^push | ^pull,^push)
|
||
(Shares the local repository(s) with the remote user and sets the specified
|
||
access mode. Use a whitespace to separate repository specs.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^tube ^unshare <rep_spec>[ ...] -^u=<remoteuser>
|
||
(Unshares the local repository(s) with the remote user. Use a whitespace to
|
||
separate repository specs.)
|
||
|
||
|
||
cm ^tube ^connect
|
||
(Connects the Unity VCS server to Plastic Tube.)
|
||
cm ^tube ^disconnect
|
||
(Disconnects the Unity VCS server from Plastic Tube.)
|
||
cm ^tube ^status
|
||
(Shows if the Unity VCS server is connected to Plastic Tube.)
|
||
|
||
Options
|
||
|
||
-^u Tube user (the plasticscm.com user).
|
||
-^p User password.
|
||
-^a Sets the access mode.
|
||
rep_spec Repository specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to
|
||
learn more about repository specs.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_TUBE ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
Use the 'cm ^tube' command to manage Plastic Tube.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^tube ^config -^u=ruben@codicesoftware.com -^p=rubenpassword
|
||
|
||
cm ^tube ^create pablo@codicesoftware.com
|
||
('pablo@codicesoftware.com' can connect to the current Plastic Tube user)
|
||
cm ^tube ^remove pablo@codicesoftware.com
|
||
|
||
cm ^tube ^local
|
||
cm ^tube ^remote
|
||
|
||
cm ^tube ^share repo@server:8087 -^u=pablo@codicesoftware.com -^a=^pull,^push
|
||
cm ^tube ^share repo@server:8087 doc@server:8087 -^u=pablo@codicesoftware.com -^a=^push
|
||
cm ^tube ^unshare repo@server:8087 -^u=pablo@codicesoftware.com
|
||
|
||
cm ^tube ^connect
|
||
cm ^tube ^disconnect
|
||
cm ^tube ^status
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_UNCO ==
|
||
Undoes the checkout of an item.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_UNCO ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^undocheckout | ^unco <item_path>[ ...] [-^a | --^all] [--^symlink] [--^silent]
|
||
[--^keepchanges | -^k]
|
||
[--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
|
||
[--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
|
||
|
||
item_path Items to apply the operation. Use a whitespace to separate
|
||
paths. Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths
|
||
containing spaces.
|
||
Use . to apply the operation to current directory.
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
-^a | --^all Undoes all of the changes in the specified items. If
|
||
the item(s) were checked out, the checkout will be
|
||
reverted. If the item(s) were locally modified, the
|
||
modifications will be reverted.
|
||
--^symlink Applies the undocheckout operation to the link and not
|
||
to the target.
|
||
--^silent Does not show any output.
|
||
--^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
|
||
--^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
|
||
specifies how the lines should start.
|
||
--^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
|
||
specifies how the lines should end.
|
||
--^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
|
||
specifies how the fields should be separated.
|
||
--^keepchanges (-^k) Undoes the checkout and preserves the local changes.
|
||
Sample: undo the checkout of a file leave it as locally
|
||
changed with the same content on disk that it was.
|
||
This option cannot be used with dynamic workspaces.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_UNCO ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
If an item is checked out and you do not want to checkin it, you can undo
|
||
the checkout using this command. Both files and folders can be unchecked
|
||
out. The item will be updated to the state it had before checking it out.
|
||
|
||
Requirements:
|
||
- The item must be under source code control.
|
||
- The item must be checked out.
|
||
|
||
Reading input from stdin:
|
||
|
||
The '^undocheckout' command can read paths from stdin. To do this, pass a
|
||
single dash "-".
|
||
Example: cm ^undocheckout ^checkin -
|
||
|
||
Paths will be read until an empty line is entered.
|
||
This allows you to use pipe to specify for which files to undo the checkout.
|
||
Example:
|
||
dir /S /B *.c | cm ^undocheckout --^all -
|
||
(In Windows, undoes the checkout of all .c files in the workspace.)
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^undocheckout .
|
||
(Undoes checkouts in the current directory.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^undocheckout file1.txt file2.txt
|
||
cm unco c:\workspace\file.txt
|
||
(Undoes checkouts of the selected files.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^unco -^a file1.txt
|
||
(Undoes checkouts or local modifications of 'file1.txt')
|
||
|
||
cm ^unco link --^symlink
|
||
(Applies the undocheckout operation to the symlink file and not to the target.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^status --^short --^changelist=pending_to_review | cm ^undocheckout -
|
||
(Undoes client changelist.
|
||
The command above will list the paths in the changelist named
|
||
'pending_to_review' and the path list will be redirected to the input of the
|
||
undocheckout command).
|
||
|
||
cm ^unco . --^machinereadable
|
||
(Undoes checkouts in the current directory, and prints the result in a
|
||
simplified, easier-to-parse format.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^unco . --^machinereadable --^startlineseparator=">" --^endlineseparator="<" \
|
||
--^fieldseparator=","
|
||
(Undoes checkouts in the current directory, and prints the result in a
|
||
simplified, easier to parse format, starting and ending the lines, and
|
||
separating the fields, with the specified strings.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_UNCOUNCHANGED ==
|
||
Undoes non-changed checked out items.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_UNCOUNCHANGED ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^uncounchanged | ^unuc <item_path>[ ...] [-^R | -^r | --^recursive]
|
||
[--^symlink] [--^silent]
|
||
|
||
item_path Items to apply the operation. Use a whitespace to separate
|
||
paths. Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths
|
||
containing spaces.
|
||
Use . to apply the operation to current directory.
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
-^R Undoes unchanged items recursively in the specified paths.
|
||
--^symlink Applies the uncounchanged operation to the link and not
|
||
to the target.
|
||
--^silent Does not show any output.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_UNCOUNCHANGED ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
This command is applied from the root of the workspace recursively.
|
||
|
||
Reading input from stdin:
|
||
|
||
The '^uncounchanged' command can read paths from stdin. To do this, pass a
|
||
single dash "-".
|
||
Example: cm ^uncounchanged -
|
||
|
||
Paths will be read until an empty line is entered.
|
||
This allows you to use pipe to specify for which unchanged files to undo
|
||
the checkout.
|
||
Example:
|
||
dir /S /B *.c | cm ^uncounchanged -
|
||
(In Windows, undoes the checkout on all unchanged .c files in the
|
||
workspace.)
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^uncounchanged . -^R
|
||
(Undoes checkouts of not changed files recursively on the current directory.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^unuc /home/myuser/mywk/project/templates -^R
|
||
(Undoes checkouts of not changed files recursively on the selected directory.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_UNDELETE ==
|
||
Undeletes an item using a specific revision.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_UNDELETE ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^undelete <revspec> <path>
|
||
|
||
revspec Specification of the revision whose contents will
|
||
be loaded in the workspace. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to
|
||
learn more about revision specs.)
|
||
path Restore path.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_UNDELETE ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
The item to undelete should not be already loaded in the workspace.
|
||
|
||
The '^undelete' operation is not supported for xlinks.
|
||
|
||
Example:
|
||
|
||
cm ^undelete ^revid:756 C:\mywks\src\foo.c
|
||
cm ^undelete ^itemid:68#^cs:2 C:\mywks\dir\myfile.pdf
|
||
cm ^undelete ^serverpath:/src#^br:/main C:\mywks\Dir
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_UNDOCHANGE ==
|
||
Undoes the changes on a path.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_UNDOCHANGE ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^undochange | ^unc <item_path>[ ...] [-^R | -^r | --^recursive]
|
||
|
||
item_path Items to apply the operation. Use a whitespace to separate
|
||
paths. Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths
|
||
containing spaces.
|
||
Use . to apply the operation to current directory.
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
-^R Applies the operation recursively.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_UNDOCHANGE ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
If an item is checked out or modified but not checked in and you do not
|
||
want to check it in, you can undo the changes using this command. The item
|
||
will be updated to the contents it had before.
|
||
|
||
Reading input from stdin:
|
||
|
||
The '^undochange' command can read paths from stdin. To do this, pass a
|
||
single dash "-".
|
||
Example: cm ^undochange -
|
||
|
||
Paths will be read until an empty line is entered.
|
||
This allows you to use pipe to specify for which files to undo changes.
|
||
Example:
|
||
dir /S /B *.c | cm ^undochange -
|
||
(In Windows, undoes the changes of all .c files in the workspace.)
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^unc .
|
||
(Undoes changes of the files on the current directory.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^undochange . -^R
|
||
(Undoes changes of the files recursively on the current directory.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^unc file1.txt "file 2.txt"
|
||
(Undoes changes of the selected files.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^unc c:\workspace\file.txt
|
||
(Undoes changes of the selected file.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_UNDO ==
|
||
Undoes changes in a workspace.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_UNDO ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^undo [<path>[ ...]] [--^symlink] [-^r | --^recursive] [<filter>[ ...]]
|
||
[--^silent | --^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
|
||
[--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
|
||
|
||
path Path of the files or directories to apply the operation to.
|
||
Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths containing spaces.
|
||
Use a whitespace to separate paths.
|
||
If no path is specified, by default the undo operation will take
|
||
all of the files in the current directory.
|
||
filter Applies the specified filter or filters to the given paths. Use
|
||
a whitespace to separate filters. See the Filters section for
|
||
more information.
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^symlink Applies the undo operation to the symlink and not
|
||
to the target.
|
||
-^r Executes the undo recursively.
|
||
--^silent Does not show any output.
|
||
--^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
|
||
--^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies
|
||
how the lines should start.
|
||
--^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies
|
||
how the lines should end.
|
||
--^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies
|
||
how the fields should be separated.
|
||
Filters:
|
||
|
||
The paths can be filtered using one or more of the filters below. Each of
|
||
those filters refers to a type of change:
|
||
--^checkedout Selects checked-out files and directories.
|
||
--^unchanged Selects files whose content is unchanged.
|
||
--^changed Selects locally changed or checked-out files and directories.
|
||
--^deleted Selects deleted files and directories.
|
||
--^moved Selects moved files and directories.
|
||
--^added Selects added files and directories.
|
||
|
||
If the path matches one or more of the specified kinds of changes, those
|
||
types of changes will be undone on that said path.
|
||
For example, if you specify both '--^checkedout' and '--^moved', if a file
|
||
is both checkedout and moved, both changes will be undone.
|
||
|
||
If no filter is specified, all kinds of changes are undone.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_UNDO ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
- If no path is specified, it will undo every change in the current
|
||
directory but not recursively.
|
||
|
||
- If one or more paths are specified, it will undo every change in the
|
||
specified paths but not recursively.
|
||
|
||
- If you want the operation to be recursive, you must specify the '-^r' flag.
|
||
To undo all of the changes below a directory including changes affecting
|
||
the directory itself, run the following command:
|
||
|
||
cm ^undo dirpath -^r
|
||
|
||
If dirpath is a workspace path, every change in the workspace will be
|
||
undone.
|
||
|
||
- The '^undo' command is dangerous because it undoes work irreversibly.
|
||
Once the ^undo has finished, it is not possible to recover the previous
|
||
state of the files and directories affected by it.
|
||
|
||
- Consider the following scenario:
|
||
|
||
/src
|
||
|- file.txt
|
||
|- code.cs
|
||
\- /test
|
||
|- test_a.py
|
||
\- test_b.py
|
||
|
||
These commands are equivalent when executed from the /src directory:
|
||
cm ^undo
|
||
cm ^undo *
|
||
cm ^undo file.txt code.cs /test
|
||
|
||
These commands are also equivalent when executed from the /src directory:
|
||
cm ^undo .
|
||
cm ^undo /src file.txt code.cs
|
||
|
||
|
||
Deleted items:
|
||
|
||
To undo file and directory deletions, you must either specify the full path
|
||
of the item, or specify the containing directory and use the recursive ('-^r')
|
||
flag.
|
||
|
||
For example:
|
||
|
||
cm ^undo .
|
||
(Does NOT undo deletions (but other changes) in the current directory.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^undo . -^r
|
||
(Undoes all deletions (and other changes) in the current directory
|
||
recursively.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^undo src/file.txt
|
||
(Undoes deletion (or other change) of src/file.txt.)
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^undo . -^r
|
||
(Undoes all changes in the current directory recursively. If executed
|
||
from the workspace's root, undoes all changes in the entire workspace.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^co file.txt
|
||
cm ^undo file.txt
|
||
(Undoes the checkout on 'file.txt'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^undo c:\otherworkspace\file.txt
|
||
(Undoes changes in file 'file.txt' located in a workspace other than the
|
||
current one.)
|
||
|
||
^echo ^content >> file.txt
|
||
cm ^undo file.txt
|
||
(Undoes the local change to 'file.txt'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^undo src
|
||
(Undoes changes to the src directory and its files.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^undo src/*
|
||
(Undoes changes in every file and directory contained in src, without
|
||
affecting src.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^undo *.cs
|
||
(Undoes changes to every file or directory that matches *.cs in the current
|
||
directory.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^undo *.cs -^r
|
||
(Undoes changes on every file or directory that matches *.cs in the current
|
||
directory and every directory below it.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^co file1.txt file2.txt
|
||
^echo ^content >> file1.txt
|
||
cm ^undo --^unchanged
|
||
(Undoes the checkout of unchanged 'file2.txt', ignoring locally changed
|
||
'file1.txt'.)
|
||
|
||
^echo ^content >> file1.txt
|
||
^echo ^content >> file2.txt
|
||
cm ^co file1.txt
|
||
cm ^undo --^checkedout
|
||
(Undoes the changes in checked-out file 'file1.txt', ignoring 'file2.txt' as
|
||
it is not checked-out.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^add file.txt
|
||
cm ^undo file.txt
|
||
(Undo the add of 'file.txt' making it once again a private file.)
|
||
|
||
^rm file1.txt
|
||
^echo ^content >> file2.txt
|
||
cm ^add file3.txt
|
||
cm ^undo --^deleted --^added *
|
||
(Undoes the 'file1.txt' delete and 'file3.txt' add, ignoring the 'file2.txt'
|
||
change.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_LOCK_UNLOCK ==
|
||
Undoes item locks on a lockserver.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_LOCK_UNLOCK ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^lock ^unlock [<repserverspec>] <guid>[ ...]
|
||
|
||
repserverspec Repository server specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec'
|
||
to learn more about repserver specs.)
|
||
guid A list of item GUIDs to be unlocked. Use a whitespace to
|
||
separate GUIDs.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_LOCK_UNLOCK ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
- The command uses the specified server to unlock the items.
|
||
- If no server is specified, the command tries to obtain a server from the
|
||
current workspace.
|
||
- If no server was calculated on the previous steps, the server is obtained
|
||
from the current Unity VCS client configuration.
|
||
- Only the administrator of the server can run the 'cm ^unlock' command.
|
||
- To specify a GUID, the format should be the 32-digit separated by
|
||
hyphens format (optionally enclosed in braces):
|
||
{00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000}
|
||
or
|
||
00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^lock ^unlock 91961b14-3dfe-4062-8c4c-f33a81d201f5
|
||
(Undoes the selected item lock.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^lock ^unlock DIGITALIS:8084 2340b4fa-47aa-4d0e-bb00-0311af847865 \
|
||
bcb98a61-2f62-4309-9a26-e21a2685e075
|
||
(Undoes the selected item locks on lockserver named 'DIGITALIS'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^lock ^unlock tardis@cloud 4740c4fa-56af-3dfe-de10-8711fa248635 \
|
||
71263c17-5eaf-5271-4d2c-a25f72e101d4
|
||
(Undoes the selected item locks on cloud lockserver named 'tardis'.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_UPDATE ==
|
||
Updates the workspace and downloads latest changes.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_UPDATE ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^update [<item_path> | --^last]
|
||
[--^changeset=<csetspec>] [--^cloaked] [--^dontmerge] [--^forced]
|
||
[--^ignorechanges] [--^override] [--^recursewk] [--^skipchangedcheck]
|
||
[--^silent] [--^verbose] [--^xml[=<output_file>]] [--^encoding=<name>]
|
||
[--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
|
||
[--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
|
||
[--^forcedetailedprogress] [--^noinput]
|
||
|
||
item_path Path to update.
|
||
Use . to apply update to current directory.
|
||
If no path is specified, then the current workspace is
|
||
fully updated.
|
||
--^last Changes the workspace selector from a changeset
|
||
configuration or a label configuration to a branch
|
||
configuration before updating.
|
||
The selector is changed to the branch the changeset or
|
||
label belongs to.
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^changeset Updates the workspace to a specific changeset.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about
|
||
changeset specs.)
|
||
--^cloaked Includes the cloaked items in the update operation.
|
||
If this option is not specified, those items that are
|
||
cloaked will be ignored in the operation.
|
||
--^dontmerge In case an update merge is required during the update
|
||
operation, does not perform it.
|
||
--^forced Forces updating items to the revision specified in
|
||
the selector.
|
||
--^ignorechanges Ignores the pending changes warning message that is
|
||
shown if there are pending changes detected when
|
||
updating the workspace.
|
||
--^noinput Skips the interactive questions to continue the
|
||
operation with pending changes or to shelve them.
|
||
--^override Overrides changed files outside Unity VCS control.
|
||
Their content will be overwritten with the server
|
||
content.
|
||
--^recursewk Updates all the workspaces found within the current
|
||
path. Useful to update all the workspaces contained
|
||
in a specific path.
|
||
--^skipchangedcheck Checks if there are local changes in your workspace
|
||
before starting. If you always checkout before
|
||
modifying a file, you can use this check and speed
|
||
up the operation.
|
||
--^silent No output is shown unless an error happens.
|
||
--^verbose Shows additional information.
|
||
--^xml Prints the output in XML format to the standard output.
|
||
It is possible to specify an output file.
|
||
--^encoding Used with the --^xml option, specifies the encoding to
|
||
use in the XML output, i.e.: utf-8.
|
||
See the MSDN documentation at
|
||
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
|
||
to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
|
||
(at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
|
||
--^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
|
||
--^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
|
||
specifies how the lines should start.
|
||
--^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
|
||
specifies how the lines should end.
|
||
--^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
|
||
specifies how the fields should be separated.
|
||
--^forcedetailedprogress Forces detailed progress even when standard output
|
||
is redirected.
|
||
== CMD_HELP_UPDATE ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
The '^update' command only downloads needed files.
|
||
|
||
The command assumes recursive operation.
|
||
|
||
When the '--^last' option is used, it is not necessary to specify a path.
|
||
In this case, the workspace the current working directory belongs to will
|
||
be updated.
|
||
(Remember that specifying this flag could cause the workspace
|
||
selector to be changed to a branch configuration if the selector was
|
||
previously pointing to a changeset or a label.)
|
||
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^update
|
||
(Updates all in the current workspace.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^update .
|
||
(Updates current directory, and all children items.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^update . --^forced --^verbose
|
||
(Forces retrieval of all revisions.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^update --^last
|
||
|
||
cm ^update . --^machinereadable --^startlineseparator=">"
|
||
(Updates current directory and prints the result in a simplified
|
||
easier-to-parse format, starting the lines with the specified
|
||
strings.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_VERSION ==
|
||
Shows the current client version number.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_VERSION ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^version
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_VERSION ==
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_WHOAMI ==
|
||
Shows the current Unity VCS user.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_WHOAMI ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^whoami
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_WHOAMI ==
|
||
Shows the current Unity VCS user.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_WORKSPACE ==
|
||
Allows the user to manage workspaces.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_WORKSPACE ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^workspace | ^wk <command> [options]
|
||
|
||
Commands:
|
||
|
||
^list | ^ls
|
||
^create | ^mk
|
||
^delete | ^rm
|
||
^move | ^mv
|
||
^rename
|
||
|
||
To get more information about each command run:
|
||
cm ^workspace <command> --^usage
|
||
cm ^workspace <command> --^help
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_WORKSPACE ==
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^workspace ^create myWorkspace wk_path
|
||
cm ^workspace ^list
|
||
cm ^workspace ^delete myWorkspace
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_WORKSPACE_CREATE ==
|
||
Creates a new workspace.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_WORKSPACE_CREATE ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^workspace | ^wk [^create | ^mk] <rep_spec>
|
||
[^create | ^mk] <wk_name> <wk_path> [<rep_spec>]
|
||
[^create | ^mk] <wk_name> <wk_path> [--^selector[=<selector_file>]
|
||
(Creates a new workspace.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^workspace | ^wk [^create | ^mk] <wk_name> <wk_path> --^dynamic --^tree=[<tree>]
|
||
(Creates a dynamic workspace. This feature is still experimental, and it's
|
||
only available for Windows.)
|
||
|
||
wk_name The new workspace name.
|
||
wk_path Path of the new workspace.
|
||
rep_spec Creates the new workspace with the specified repository.
|
||
Repository specification: check 'cm ^help ^objectspec'.
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^selector Edits a selector for the new workspace.
|
||
If a selector file is specified, then sets the selector
|
||
for the new workspace from the specified file.
|
||
--^dynamic Creates a dynamic workspace. This feature is still
|
||
experimental, and it's only available for Windows.
|
||
Specifying this flag requires using the --^tree parameter.
|
||
--^tree Used with the '--^dynamic' flag, specifies the initial
|
||
point the dynamic workspace is going to load. It can
|
||
either be a branch, changeset, or label specification.
|
||
The workspace will later on use the repository in the
|
||
spec. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_WORKSPACE_CREATE ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
- A workspace is a view of the repository mapped to the local filesystem.
|
||
The workspace selector defines the rules that specify workspace content.
|
||
Use 'cm ^showselector' to display a workspace selector or 'cm ^setselector'
|
||
to modify it.
|
||
- If neither rep_spec nor '--^selector' is specified, then the workspace
|
||
will automatically be configured to use the first repository
|
||
(alphabetically) of the server configured in the client.conf file.
|
||
- The dynamic workspaces is a experimental feature (Windows only), and it
|
||
requires the plasticfs.exe program running.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^workspace ^create mycode
|
||
cm ^wk ^mk mycode
|
||
(Creates a 'mycode' workspace pointing to the repository with the same name.
|
||
The workspace directory will be created under the current directory.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^wk ^mk mycode@localhost:8084
|
||
cm ^wk ^mk mycode@myorganization@cloud
|
||
(Creates a 'mycode' workspace as before, but you can specify different repository server.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^workspace ^create myworkspace c:\workspace
|
||
cm ^wk ^mk myworkspace /home/john/plastic_view
|
||
(Creates 'myworkspace' workspace in Windows and in Linux respectively.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^wk mywktest c:\wks\wktest --^selector=myselector.txt
|
||
(Creates 'mywktest' workspace using the selector in 'myselector.txt' file.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^wk mywkprj c:\wks\wkprj myrep@^repserver:localhost:8084
|
||
(Creates 'mywkprj' workspace with the selected repository.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^wk mywkprj c:\dynwks\mywkprj --^dynamic --^tree=^br:/main@myrep@localhost:8084
|
||
(Creates dynamic 'mywkprj' workspace with the 'myrep@localhost:8084'
|
||
repository, pointing to '^br:/main' the first time it gets mounted.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_WORKSPACE_DELETE ==
|
||
Deletes a workspace.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_WORKSPACE_DELETE ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^workspace | ^wk ^delete | ^rm [<wk_path> | <wkspec>] [--^keepmetadata]
|
||
|
||
wk_path Path of the workspace to be deleted.
|
||
wkspec Specification of the workspace to delete. (Use
|
||
'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^keepmetadata Does not delete the metadata files in the .plastic
|
||
folder.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_WORKSPACE_DELETE ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
This command deletes a workspace, specified by path or spec.
|
||
If no arguments are specified, current workspace will be assumed.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^workspace ^delete
|
||
(Removes current workspace.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^wk ^delete c:\workspace
|
||
cm ^workspace rm /home/danipen/wks
|
||
cm ^wk ^rm ^wk:MiWorkspace
|
||
cm ^wk ^rm ^wk:MiWorkspace@DIGITALIS
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_WORKSPACE_LIST ==
|
||
Lists workspaces.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_WORKSPACE_LIST ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^workspace | ^wk [^list | ^ls] [--^format=<str_format>]
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
|
||
Remarks for more info.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_WORKSPACE_LIST ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
Output format parameters (--^format option):
|
||
This command accepts a format string to show the output.
|
||
The output parameters of this command are the following:
|
||
|
||
{0} | {^wkname} Workspace name.
|
||
{1} | {^machine} Client machine name.
|
||
{2} | {^path} Workspace path.
|
||
{3} | {^wkid} Workspace unique identifier.
|
||
{4} | {^wkspec} Workspace specification using the format:
|
||
'wkname@machine'.
|
||
{^tab} Inserts a tab space.
|
||
{^newline} Inserts a new line.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^wk
|
||
(Lists all workspaces.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^workspace ^list --^format={0}#{3,40}
|
||
cm ^workspace ^list --^format={^wkname}#{^wkid,40}
|
||
(Lists all workspaces and shows the workspace name, a # symbol and the
|
||
workspace GUID field in 40 spaces, aligned to left.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^wk --^format="Workspace {0} in path {2}"
|
||
cm ^wk --^format="Workspace {^wkname} in path {^path}"
|
||
(Lists all workspaces and shows result as formatted strings.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_WORKSPACE_MOVE ==
|
||
Moves a workspace.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_WORKSPACE_MOVE ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^workspace | ^wk ^move | ^mv [<wkspec>] <new_path>
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
wkspec Specification of the workspace to move. (Use
|
||
'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
|
||
new_path Workspace will be moved to here.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_WORKSPACE_MOVE ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
This command allows users to move a workspace to another location on disk.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^workspace ^move myWorkspace \new\workspaceDirectory
|
||
(Moves 'myWorkspace' to the specified location.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^wk ^mv c:\users\maria\wkspaces\newlocation
|
||
(Moves the current workspace to the new location.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_WORKSPACE_RENAME ==
|
||
Renames a workspace.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_WORKSPACE_RENAME ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^workspace | ^wk ^rename [<wk_name>] <new_name>
|
||
|
||
wk_name Workspace to rename.
|
||
new_name New name for the workspace.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_WORKSPACE_RENAME ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
This command renames a workspace.
|
||
If no workspace name is supplied, the current workspace will be used.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^workspace ^rename mywk1 wk2
|
||
(Renames the workspace 'mywk1' to 'wk2'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^wk ^rename newname
|
||
(Renames the current workspace to 'newname'.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_WORKSPACESTATUS ==
|
||
Shows changes in the workspace.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_WORKSPACESTATUS ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^status [<wk_path>] [--^changelist[=<name>] | --^changelists] [--^cutignored]
|
||
[ --^header] [ --^noheader] [ --^nomergesinfo] [ --^head]
|
||
[--^short] [--^symlink] [ --^dirwithchanges] [--^xml[=<output_file>]]
|
||
[--^encoding=<name>] [ --^wrp | --^wkrootrelativepaths]
|
||
[--^fullpaths | --^fp] [<legacy_options>] [<search_types>[ ...]]
|
||
[--^pretty]
|
||
[--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=sep]
|
||
[--^endlineseparator=sep] [--^fieldseparator=sep]]
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
wk_path Path of the workspace where the search will be
|
||
performed.
|
||
--^changelist Shows changes in the selected changelist.
|
||
--^changelists Shows changes grouped in client changelists.
|
||
--^cutignored Skips the contents of ignored directories.
|
||
Requires the '--^ignored' search type. See the Search
|
||
types section for more information.
|
||
--^header Only prints the workspace status.
|
||
--^noheader Only prints the modified item search result.
|
||
--^nomergesinfo Doesn't print the merge info for changes.
|
||
--^head Prints the status of the last changeset on the branch.
|
||
--^short Lists only paths that contains changes.
|
||
--^symlink Applies the operation to the symlink and not to the
|
||
target.
|
||
--^dirwithchanges Shows directories that contain changes inside them
|
||
(added, moved, removed items inside).
|
||
--^xml Prints the output in XML format to the standard output.
|
||
It is possible to specify an output file.
|
||
--^pretty Prints workspace changes in a nice table format.
|
||
--^encoding Used with the --^xml option, specifies the encoding to
|
||
use in the XML output, i.e.: utf-8.
|
||
See the MSDN documentation at
|
||
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
|
||
to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
|
||
(at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
|
||
--^wrp Print workspace root relative paths instead of
|
||
current directory relative paths.
|
||
--^fullpaths, --^fp Force printing absolute paths, overriding any other
|
||
path printing setting.
|
||
--^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
|
||
--^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
|
||
specifies how the lines should start.
|
||
--^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
|
||
specifies how the lines should end.
|
||
--^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
|
||
specifies how the fields should be separated.
|
||
--^iscochanged Shows whether contents of a checked-out file have
|
||
changed or not. This flag is only available with
|
||
"--^compact", "--^xml" and "--^machinereadable" options.
|
||
If this flag is not set, the "--^compact", "--^xml" or
|
||
"--^machinereadable" options will show just "^CO"
|
||
status for a checked-out file with its contents
|
||
changed.
|
||
If this flag is set, the "--^compact", "--^xml" or
|
||
"--^machinereadable" options will show "^CO+CH" status
|
||
for a checked-out file with its contents changed.
|
||
|
||
Legacy options:
|
||
|
||
--^cset Prints the workspace status in the legacy format.
|
||
--^compact Prints the workspace status and changelists in the
|
||
legacy format.
|
||
--^noheaders When used in conjunction with the '--^compact' flag, the
|
||
changelist headers will not be printed. (Does not apply
|
||
to the new changelists format.)
|
||
|
||
Search types:
|
||
|
||
--^added Prints added items.
|
||
--^checkout Prints checkedout items.
|
||
--^changed Prints changed items.
|
||
--^copied Prints copied items.
|
||
--^replaced Prints replaced items.
|
||
--^deleted Prints deleted items.
|
||
--^localdeleted Prints locally deleted items.
|
||
--^moved Prints moved items.
|
||
--^localmoved Prints locally moved items.
|
||
--^percentofsimilarity=<value> Percent of similarity between two files in
|
||
order to consider them the same item. Used
|
||
in the locally moved search. Its default
|
||
value is 20%.
|
||
--^txtsameext Only those text files that have the same
|
||
extension will be taken into account by the
|
||
similarity content matching process during
|
||
the moved items search. By default, any
|
||
text file will be processed.
|
||
--^binanyext Any binary file will be taken into account
|
||
by the similarity content matching process
|
||
during the moved items search. By default,
|
||
only those binary files that have the same
|
||
extension will be processed.
|
||
--^private Prints non controlled items.
|
||
--^ignored Prints ignored items.
|
||
--^hiddenchanged Prints hidden changed items. (Includes
|
||
'--^changed')
|
||
--^cloaked Prints cloaked items.
|
||
--^controlledchanged This flag substitutes the following options:
|
||
'--^added', '--^checkout', '--^copied',
|
||
'--^replaced', '--^deleted', '--^moved'.
|
||
--^all This flag replaces the following parameters:
|
||
'--^controlledchanged', '--^changed',
|
||
'--^localdeleted', '--^localmoved', '--^private'.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_WORKSPACESTATUS ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
The '^status' command prints the loaded changeset on a workspace and gets
|
||
the changed elements inside the workspace.
|
||
|
||
This command can be used to show the pending changes in a workspace; the
|
||
type of changes that can be searched can be modified by using the command
|
||
parameters. By default, all changes are displayed, be they controlled
|
||
or local.
|
||
|
||
The percent of similarity parameter '--^percentofsimilarity' (-^p) is used
|
||
by the locally moved search to decide if two elements are the same item.
|
||
The default value is 20% but it can be adjusted.
|
||
|
||
It is possible to show workspace changes grouped by client changelists.
|
||
The '^default' changelist includes the changes that are not included in
|
||
other changelists. That being said, the changes the default changelist
|
||
will show depends on the search types flags specified.
|
||
|
||
Showing changes grouped by changelists requires showing controlled
|
||
changes too (items with status equal to '^added', '^checkout', '^copied',
|
||
'^replaced', '^deleted', or '^moved'). So, the '--^controlledchanged' option
|
||
will be automatically enabled when changelists are shown.
|
||
|
||
The default encoding for XML output is utf-8.
|
||
|
||
By default, this command will print current directory relative paths,
|
||
unless the '--^machinereadable' or '--^short' flags are specified. If
|
||
any of them are specified, the command will print absolute paths.
|
||
|
||
If '--^xml' flag is specified, workspace root relative paths will
|
||
be printed (unless the '--^fp' flag is also specified, printing
|
||
absolute paths instead).
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^status
|
||
(Prints the working changeset and also all item types changed in the
|
||
workspace, except the ignored ones.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^status --^controlledchanged
|
||
(Prints the working changeset and also the items that are checkedout, added,
|
||
copied, replaced, deleted, and moved.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^status --^added
|
||
(Prints only the working changeset and the added items inside the workspace.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^status c:\workspaceLocation\code\client --^added
|
||
(Prints the working changeset and the added items under the specified path
|
||
recursively.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^status --^changelists
|
||
cm ^status --^changelist
|
||
(Shows all the workspace changes grouped by client changelists.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^status --^changelist=pending_to_review
|
||
(Shows the changes on the changelist named 'pending_to_review'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^status --^changelist=default --^private
|
||
(Shows the changes in the 'default' changelist, showing private items, along
|
||
with items with controlled changes, if any.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^status --^short --^changelist=pending_to_review | cm ^checkin -
|
||
(Checkins the changes in the changelist 'pending_to_review'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^status C:\workspaceLocation --^xml=output.xml
|
||
(Gets the status information in XML format and using utf-8 in the file
|
||
output.xml.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^status --^ignored
|
||
(Shows all ignored items.)
|
||
Output:
|
||
/main@myrepo@local (^cs:2 - ^head)
|
||
^Added
|
||
Status Size Last Modified Path
|
||
|
||
^Ignored 0 bytes 19 seconds ago out\app.exe
|
||
^Ignored 48 seconds ago src
|
||
^Ignored 0 bytes 48 seconds ago src\version.c
|
||
|
||
cm ^status --^ignored --^cutignored
|
||
(Shows ignored files whose parent directory is not ignored and ignored
|
||
directories but not their contents.)
|
||
Output:
|
||
/main@myrepo@local (^cs:2 - ^head)
|
||
^Added
|
||
Status Size Last Modified Path
|
||
|
||
^Ignored 0 bytes 19 seconds ago out\app.exe
|
||
^Ignored 48 seconds ago src
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_XLINK ==
|
||
Creates, edits, or displays details of an Xlink.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_XLINK ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^xlink [-^w] [-^rs] <xlink_path> / (<csetspec> | <lbspec> | <brspec)>
|
||
[<expansion_rules>[ ...]]
|
||
(Creates an Xlink.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^xlink [-^rs] <xlink_path> /<relative_path> (<csetspec> | <lbspec> | <brspec>)
|
||
[<expansion_rules>[ ...]]
|
||
(Creates a readonly partial Xlink pointing to /<relative_path> instead of
|
||
the default root / .)
|
||
|
||
cm ^xlink -^e <xlink_path> (<csetspec> | <lbspec> | <brspec>)
|
||
(Edits an Xlink to change the target specification.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^xlink -^s|--^show <xlink_path>
|
||
(Shows the Xlink information including the expansion rules.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^xlink -^ar|--^addrules <xlink_path> <expansion_rules>[ ...]
|
||
(Adds the given expansion rules to the Xlink.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^xlink -^dr|--^deleterules <xlink_path> <expansion_rules>[ ...]
|
||
(Removes the given expansion rules from the Xlink.)
|
||
|
||
xlink_path This is the directory in the current workspace where
|
||
the linked repository will be mounted (when creating an
|
||
Xlink) or is mounted (when editing an Xlink).
|
||
csetspec The full target changeset specification in the remote
|
||
repository.
|
||
This determines what version and branch is loaded in the
|
||
workspace for the linked repository.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about changeset
|
||
specs.)
|
||
lbspec The full label specification in the remote repository.
|
||
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about label
|
||
specs.)
|
||
brspec The full branch specification in the remote repository.
|
||
This uses the current changeset where the specified
|
||
branch is pointing to. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to
|
||
learn more about branch specs.)
|
||
-^e Edits an existing Xlink to change the target changeset
|
||
specification.
|
||
-^s | --^show Shows information about the selected Xlink.
|
||
-^ar | --^addrules Adds one or more expansion rules to the selected Xlink.
|
||
-^dr | --^deleterules Deletes one or more expansion rules from the selected
|
||
Xlink.
|
||
expansion_rules To specify one or more expansion rule. Each expansion
|
||
rule is a pair branch-target branch:
|
||
^br:/main/fix-^br:/main/develop/fix
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
-^w Indicates that the Xlink is writable. This means that
|
||
the contents of the target repository can be modified
|
||
through branch autoexpansion.
|
||
-^rs Relative server. This option allows creating a relative
|
||
Xlink that is independent of the repository server. This
|
||
way, Xlinks created in replicated repositories in
|
||
different servers will be automatically identified.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_XLINK ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
This command creates an Xlink to a given changeset. By default, a read-only
|
||
Xlink is created. This means that the contents loaded in the workspace
|
||
inside the Xlink cannot be modified. To be able to make changes in the
|
||
Xlinked content, create a writable Xlink instead (using the '-^w' option).
|
||
|
||
It is possible to use a simplified syntax of the command when editing the
|
||
target changeset of an Xlink. This way, the only required parameter is the
|
||
new target changeset. The rest of parameters of the Xlink will not be
|
||
modified.
|
||
|
||
Branch auto-expansion:
|
||
|
||
When a change is made in any writable-xlinked repositories ('-^w' option), a
|
||
new branch needs to be created in the target repository. The name of the
|
||
new branch is based on the checkout branch defined in the top-level
|
||
repository. To determine the name of the branch to use, these rules apply:
|
||
|
||
1) A check is made to see if a branch with the same full name exists
|
||
in the target repository:
|
||
- If it exists, this is used as the checkout branch.
|
||
- If it does not exist, the branch name is built this way:
|
||
- Name of the branch of the target Xlinked changeset + short name of
|
||
the checkout branch (last part).
|
||
- If this branch exists, it is used as the checkout branch.
|
||
- Otherwise, the branch is created and the branch base is set to the
|
||
Xlinked changeset.
|
||
|
||
2) A new version of the Xlink is created in the branch on the parent
|
||
repository pointing to the new changeset in the Xlinked repository.
|
||
|
||
Finally, the complete Xlink structure is kept up to date with the latest
|
||
changes in the right versions.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^xlink code\firstrepo / 1@first@localhost:8084
|
||
(Creates an Xlink in folder 'firstrepo' in the current workspace where the
|
||
changeset '1' in the repository 'first' will be mounted.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^xlink opengl\include /includes/opengl 1627@includes@localhost:8087
|
||
(Creates a readonly partial Xlink in directory 'opengl\include' in the
|
||
current workspace where the path '/includes/opengl' in changeset '1627' in
|
||
the repository 'includes' will be mounted as root. It means that whatever
|
||
is inside '/includes/opengl' will be mounted in 'opengl\include' while the
|
||
rest of the repository will be ignored.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^xlink -^w -^rs code\secondrepo / ^lb:LB001@second@localhost:8084
|
||
(Creates a writable and relative Xlink in folder 'secondrepo' in the
|
||
current workspace where the label 'LB001' in the repository 'second' will
|
||
be mounted.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^xlink code\thirdrepo / 3@third@localhost:8087 ^br:/main-^br:/main/scm003
|
||
(Creates an Xlink in folder 'thirdrepo' in the current workspace where the
|
||
changeset '3' in the repository 'third' will be mounted.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^xlink -^e code\secondrepo ^br:/main/task1234@second@localhost:8084
|
||
(Edits the Xlink 'code\secondrepo' to change the target repository by
|
||
linking the branch 'main/task1234' in the repository 'second'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^xlink --^show code\thirdrepo
|
||
(Shows information of the Xlink 'code\thirdrepo' including its expansion
|
||
rules if exist).
|
||
|
||
cm ^xlink -^ar code\secondrepo ^br:/main-^br:/main/develop ^br:/main/fix-^br:/main/develop/fix
|
||
(Adds two expansion rules to the xlink 'code\secondrepo'.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^xlink -^dr code\secondrepo ^br:/main/fix-^br:/main/develop/fix
|
||
(Deletes the expansion rule from the xlink 'code\secondrepo').
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_AUTOCOMPLETE ==
|
||
Allows to implement autocomplete suggestions in a line at the cursor position.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^autocomplete ^install
|
||
(Installs 'cm' command completion in the shell.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^autocomplete ^uninstall
|
||
(Uninstalls 'cm' command completion from the shell.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^autocomplete --^line <shell_line> --^position <cursor_position>
|
||
(Returns autocomplete suggestions for 'shell_line' to be inserted at
|
||
'cursor_position'.)
|
||
|
||
shell_line The line the user has written into the shell when the
|
||
autocompletion was requested.
|
||
In Bash, it is at the COMP_LINE environment variable.
|
||
In PowerShell, it is at the $wordToComplete variable.
|
||
cursor_position The position of the cursor when the autocompletion was
|
||
requested.
|
||
In Bash, it is at the COMP_POINT environment variable.
|
||
In PowerShell, it is at the $cursorPosition variable.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_AUTOCOMPLETE ==
|
||
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
This command is not intended to be used by the final user,
|
||
but it is documented in case it is needed to extend autocompletion
|
||
support for the shell of choice.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^autocomplete --^line "cm ^show" --^position 7
|
||
(Shows a list of commands starting with "show". In this case:
|
||
showcommands, showfindobjects, showacl, showowner, showpermissions,
|
||
showselector.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_API ==
|
||
Starts a local HTTP server that listens for REST API requests.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_API ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
|
||
cm ^api [(-^p|--^port)=<portnumber>] [(-^r|--^remote)]
|
||
|
||
Options:
|
||
|
||
-^p | --^port Tells the server to listen on port <portnumber>
|
||
instead of 9090.
|
||
|
||
-^r | --^remote Allows incoming remote connections. This means
|
||
connections that come from other hosts instead of the
|
||
local one.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_API ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
The cm ^api command allows programmers to perform Unity VCS client operations
|
||
in their machines.
|
||
Read the Unity VCS API Guide for more information:
|
||
https://www.plasticscm.com/documentation/restapi/plastic-scm-version-control-rest-api-guide
|
||
|
||
By default, the API listens for local connections only, on port 9090.
|
||
|
||
Press the Enter key to stop the server.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^api
|
||
(Starts the API listening on port 9090, local connections only.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^api -^r
|
||
(Starts the API listening on port 9090, allowing any incoming connection.)
|
||
|
||
cm ^api --^port=15000 -^r
|
||
(Starts the API listening on port 15000, allowing any incoming connection.)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_CONFIGURECLIENT ==
|
||
Configures the Unity VCS client for the current machine user to work with a default server.
|
||
|
||
== CMD_USAGE_CONFIGURECLIENT ==
|
||
Usage:
|
||
cm ^configure [--^language=<language> --^workingmode=<mode> [AuthParameters]
|
||
--^server=<server> [--^port=<port>]] [--^clientconf=<clientconfpath>]
|
||
|
||
--^language Available languages:
|
||
en (English)
|
||
es (Spanish)
|
||
|
||
--^workingmode Available users/security working modes:
|
||
NameWorkingMode (Name)
|
||
NameIDWorkingMode (Name + ID)
|
||
LDAPWorkingMode (LDAP)
|
||
ADWorkingMode (Active Directory)
|
||
UPWorkingMode (User and password)
|
||
SSOWorkingMode (Single Sign On)
|
||
|
||
AuthParameters Auth parameters (only for ^LDAPWorkingMode and ^UPWorkingMode):
|
||
--^user=<user>
|
||
--^password=<password>
|
||
|
||
Single Sign On parameters (only for ^SSOWorkingMode):
|
||
--^user=<user>
|
||
--^token=<token>
|
||
|
||
--^server Unity VCS server IP / address
|
||
|
||
--^port Unity VCS server port
|
||
(port optional for Cloud servers)
|
||
|
||
--^clientconf File path used to create the configuration file (optional)
|
||
Argument can be a full path, a filename or a directory.
|
||
If this parameter is not specified, the default directory for
|
||
'client.conf' file would be:
|
||
* '%LocalAppData%\plastic4' on Windows
|
||
* '$HOME/.plastic4' on linux/macOS
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
--^clientconf=c:/path/to/myclient.conf
|
||
(Specified path will be used to create the client configuration file)
|
||
|
||
--^clientconf=myclient.conf
|
||
(File myclient.conf inside default config directory will be used)
|
||
|
||
--^clientconf=c:/exisitingDirectory
|
||
(Default filename, client.conf, in specified directory will be used)
|
||
|
||
== CMD_HELP_CONFIGURECLIENT ==
|
||
Remarks:
|
||
|
||
The cm ^configure command cannot be used on Cloud Edition or DVCS Edition of Unity VCS.
|
||
Use 'plastic --configure' instead.
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
cm ^configure
|
||
(runs the interactive Unity VCS client configuration command)
|
||
|
||
cm ^configure --^language=^en --^workingmode=^LDAPWorkingMode --^user=^jack --^password=^01234 \
|
||
--^server=^plastic.mymachine.com --^port=^8084
|
||
(configures the Unity VCS client with the specified parameters and creates the 'client.conf'
|
||
configuration file in the default directory).
|
||
|
||
cm ^configure --^language=^en --^workingmode=^NameWorkingMode --^server=^plastic.mymachine.com \
|
||
--^port=^8084 --^clientconf=^clientconf_exp.conf
|
||
(configures the Unity VCS client with the specified parameters and creates the 'client.conf'
|
||
configuration file in the specified path).
|